BVH2414GB

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM®
Instruction Manual
VIF 20170
BV-H2414 GB
PASS - Service you can rely on
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists,
you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever –
you need us.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

on hand to analyze problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest
Schenck Process Location.
Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

Then our service system PASS is the ticket. It covers the en-
tire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full
service. Interested?
Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
© by Schenck Process GmbH

Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
Phone: +49 6151 1531-0 ; www.schenckprocess.com
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,

regardless of method, without prior permission by STOCK
EQUIPMENT in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: Translation of the original German Instruction
(origin: ST4, 499198859 V1)

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 About This Manual ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................1
................................1
2 Safety notes................................
notes................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................3
..........3
2.1 Signal Words .........................................................................................................................................4
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ................................................................................................4
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ..............................................................................................5
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ..........................................................................................6
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ........................................................................................6
3 General Diagram
Diagram ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..................................................................
..................................7
..7
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?...........................................................................................................7
3.2 Some Definitions ...................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Measuring principle ...............................................................................................................................8
3.4 Automatic control ...................................................................................................................................9
3.5 Control operating modes .......................................................................................................................9
3.6 Batching .............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.7 Additional Bin Weighers ..................................................................................................................... 10
4 Operation................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
............................................................................
............................................11
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power ................................................................................................. 11
4.2 Operating and Control Access............................................................................................................ 11
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ........................................ 12
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable .................................................................................................. 12
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 12
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 ............................................................................................................... 13
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 13
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet ............................................................................................................. 13
4.2.2.2 Connection via RS232 ............................................................................................................... 14
4.2.2.3 Connection via WLAN ................................................................................................................ 14
4.2.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 14
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 15
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU) .......................................................................... 15
4.3 VHM operating panel .......................................................................................................................... 17
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields ..................................................................................................... 18
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device .................................................................................................................... 18
4.3.1.2 Event messages ......................................................................................................................... 18
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range .................................................................................................... 18
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation ........................................................................................................................ 19
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection .......................................................................................................................... 19
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics ................................................................................................. 19
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................................... 19
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation ................................................................................................... 19
4.3.2 Operating Fields and Function Calls .......................................................................................... 20
4.3.3 Authorization for Control Commands ......................................................................................... 21
4.3.3.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation............................................. 21
DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

Schenck Process Group -i-
Table of Contents
4.3.3.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .......... 21
4.3.3.3 Access to Special Functions ...................................................................................................... 22
4.3.4 Basic Operating Functions ......................................................................................................... 22
4.3.4.1 Switch Feeding On/Off ............................................................................................................... 22
4.3.4.2 Set setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 23
4.3.4.3 Relative Setpoint ........................................................................................................................ 23
4.3.4.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter............................................................................ 24
4.3.4.5 Acknowledging Event Messages ............................................................................................... 24
4.3.5 Special Operating Functions ...................................................................................................... 25
4.3.5.1 Trend .......................................................................................................................................... 25
4.3.5.2 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ........................................................................................................... 27
4.3.5.3 Cleaning and Testing the Display .............................................................................................. 28
4.3.5.4 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ................................................................................. 28
4.3.5.5 Display Stored Counter Readings .............................................................................................. 28
4.3.5.6 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. ....................................................................... 28
4.3.5.7 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation .......................................................................................... 28
4.3.6 Service Functions ....................................................................................................................... 29
4.3.6.1 Display Parameter Alterations.................................................................................................... 29
4.3.6.2 Reading and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 29
4.3.6.3 Setting the Clock ........................................................................................................................ 30
4.3.6.4 Reset to Factory Settings ........................................................................................................... 30
4.3.6.5 Simulation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 31
4.3.6.6 Access to calibration functions ................................................................................................... 31
4.3.7 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ....................................................................................... 32
4.3.7.1 Accessing the Configuration ...................................................................................................... 32
4.3.7.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ............................................................................................... 32
4.3.7.3 Setting the Display ..................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.7.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ............................................................................ 33
4.3.7.5 Set the Homepage (Config) ....................................................................................................... 34
4.3.7.6 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ............................................................................. 34
4.3.7.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen ...................................................................................................... 35
4.3.7.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) .................................................................................. 35
4.3.7.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) .......................................................................................... 35
4.3.7.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information ........................................................................................ 35
4.4 Calibration programs .......................................................................................................................... 36
4.4.1 Taring the flowthrough measurement ........................................................................................ 36
4.4.2 Flowthrough measurement zero setting ..................................................................................... 36
4.4.3 Weight check flowthrough meter ................................................................................................ 37
4.4.4 Taring the bin weigher................................................................................................................ 38
4.4.5 Bin weight control ....................................................................................................................... 38
4.4.6 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .................................................................................... 39
4.4.7 Linearizing the measurement ..................................................................................................... 40
4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME) .............................................................................. 40
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement .................................................................................................. 41
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) ............................................................................... 43
5 Startup ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................45
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components .............................................................................................. 45
5.2 Electrical Connections ........................................................................................................................ 45
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................... 45
5.4 Entering Basic parameters ................................................................................................................ 45
5.5 Adjusting the flow rate regulation ....................................................................................................... 45
BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

- ii - Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
5.6 Check with bulk solids ........................................................................................................................ 47

5.7 Calibrating bin weighing ..................................................................................................................... 47
6 Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................

................................................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................49
7 Parameters ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................51
7.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 52
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 52
7.3 Configuring Event Messages.............................................................................................................. 54
7.4 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................... 55
7.4.1 Parameter Overview .................................................................................................................. 55
7.4.2 Parameter Details ...................................................................................................................... 75
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules .................................................................................. 75
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ..................................................................................... 78
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ..................................................................................... 83
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ...................................................................................... 86
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .............................................................................................. 88
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ......................................................................................... 89
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring ................................................................................... 89
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters....................................................................................................... 94
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ............................................................................................. 95
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ...................................................................................... 96
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ......................................................................................... 97
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................... 102
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................... 105
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................... 110
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ........................................................................................... 112
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval ............................................................................. 116
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................... 117
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus....................................................................... 118
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................... 123
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet ................................................................................................. 127
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................... 127
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher ........................................................................................... 129
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller ............................................................................... 137
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Check System ....................................................................................... 145
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Moisture................................................................................................. 156
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Additional device ................................................................................... 159
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Dead Time ............................................................................................. 161
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Interlocking ............................................................................................ 163
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................. 166
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................ 170
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Data Logging ......................................................................................... 173
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................... 175
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Linearization .......................................................................................... 177
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - Flow Gate .............................................................................................. 178
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Local Mode (Speed) .............................................................................. 180
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................ 190
8 Event Messages ................................................................

................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 193
8.1 Events Details ................................................................................................................................... 193
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration .......................................................................................................... 193
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement .......................................................................................... 194

Schenck Process Group - iii -
Table of Contents
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ........................................................................................................... 197

8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System ............................................................................................... 199
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock ............................................................................................................. 201
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow...................................................................................................... 202
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................... 203
8.1.8 Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................... 205
8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ......................................................................................... 205
8.1.10 Event Group: System Message ............................................................................................... 206
9 Appendix ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
.......................................... 209
9.1 Setpoint and switch-on sources........................................................................................................ 209
9.2 Measuring the flow rate (measure) ................................................................................................... 211
9.3 Flow rate regulation .......................................................................................................................... 212
9.3.1 Constant controller ................................................................................................................... 213
9.3.2 Step controller .......................................................................................................................... 218
9.4 Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................... 221
9.5 Local operation ................................................................................................................................. 223
9.5.1 Controlling with VLG ................................................................................................................ 223
9.5.2 Controlling with VMO ............................................................................................................... 223
9.5.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves ................................................................. 226
9.5.2.2 The logic for position-controlled feed gates ............................................................................. 228
9.6 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ......................................................................................................... 230
9.7 Continuous bin fill level control ......................................................................................................... 231
9.8 Bin fill level regulation via feed gate ................................................................................................. 233
9.9 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ......................................................................... 235
9.10 Adjusting linearization ....................................................................................................................... 236
9.11 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ....................................................................................... 237
9.12 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ............................................ 239
9.13 PLC Functionality (Optional)............................................................................................................. 240
9.13.1 Handling the Function Blocks................................................................................................... 241
9.13.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals .......................................................................................... 242
9.13.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ......................................................................................... 243
9.14 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ................................................................................. 245
9.15 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ....................................................................... 246
Index ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 247

- iv - Schenck Process Group
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

The operating manual for solids flow meters MULTISTREAM is intended both for the operating person-
nel for the scale and for service technicians. It describes the functionality of the VIF 20170-001 software.
The following software releases or later must be available to ensure that a DISOCONT Tersus sys-
tem will operate correctly with this software version:
▪
VPC 20150-022 → Service tool 'Schenck Process EasyServe' (short: EasyServe)
▪
VHM 20170-007 → VHM operating panel
▪
For the sake of simplicity, the DISOCONT Tersus system will also be called the weighing elec-
tronics, controller, scale or unit hereinafter.
– The BV-H2406 system manual contains information on its electronic structure.
– DISOCONT is a registered trademark of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt.
▪
The Windows-based Schenck Process EasyServe program is a service tool for conveniently
handling continuous scales based on weighing electronics such as DISOCONT Tersus.
– For the sake of simplicity, this tool will also briefly be called EasyServe here.
– The BV-H2185 operating manual describes EasyServe's functionality.
This manual is available in different forms:

▪
A printed version
▪
An electronic document in the platform-independent ADOBE format (file ending: *.PDF)
▪
As online help in the Microsoft Windows HTMLHelp format (file ending: *.CHM)

Schenck Process Group -1-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally you should also observe:
▪
Safety information given in order-specific documentation
▪
Safety information relating to mechanical components
▪
Instructions and safety instructions for parts manufactured by thrid-party suppliers or parts that are not
part of Schenck's scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Use
The measuring system and connected mechanical components is intended solely for weighing tasks and
related control applications. It is not intended for any other use.
Risks
If properly installed and put into service the measuring system itself does not represent a hazard.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Po-
tential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported or me-
tered in. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle
the system.
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The operating company is fully
responsible for overall plant safety.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the tech-
nical documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instruc-
tions given.
Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only personnel familiar with the device's mode
of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Parameters incorrectly set
may cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a control system is connected. They can also ad-
versely affect weighing operation.
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating
company has to ensure safe password handling.
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.

Safety notes
Service and Maintenance

▪
Observe any warning symbols on the scales.
▪
The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peri-
pheral devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring sys-
tem cannot be inadvertently restarted.
▪
Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug!).
▪
The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.
Moisture and Humidity

Humidity
All of the parts of the scales, particularly electrical components, must be protected from moisture and humid-
ity when the housing is open such as during service work. Observe housing protection standards.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which
could affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this require-
ment is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the
warranty will be void.
2.1 Signal Words
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

Potential hazards will always exist when working with technical devices. Hazards will arise if the machine
▪
is incorrectly installed,
▪
is started up incorrectly,
▪
is operated by untrained personnel, or
▪
is repaired by unqualified personnel.
In this manual the following signal words will indicate hazards that may arise when using this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the
most severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.

-4- Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up
to and including death.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium
injuries.
2.1.2 Signal
Signal Words for Application Notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environ-
mental damage could occur.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product eco-
nomically and at an optimal level of efficiency.

Safety notes
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems.
Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on
live components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components
DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are nei-
ther damaged nor defective.
1. Qualified personnel must immediately replace or, if possible, repair
damaged or defective electrical components.

General Diagram
3 General Diagram
The basic functions of the DISOCONT Tersus in combination with a feeder or measuring equipment will be
explained in this chapter.
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?

DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile modular electronic system for weighing and feeding technology.
Its components are:
▪
the VCU control unit ('scales controller')
▪
the VHM local operating panel
▪
Input/output expansion modules
The DISOCONT Tersus has been designed for continuous measurement and control tasks or for disconti-
nuous batching.
All weighing-related functions and process functions for measuring and feeding bulk solids are performed by
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
The DISOCONT Tersus is customizable and very flexible in terms of its physical layout and interconnection.
DISOCONT Tersus can be used in the following areas with specific software for weighing and feeding job
applications:
▪
Steel
▪
Cement production
▪
Chemical industry
▪
Foodstuffs industry
▪
Power plants
It supports the following plant systems in connection with the right mechanical equipment:
▪
Beltweighers
▪
Weighfeeders
▪
Loss-in-weight feeders
▪
Filling plants
▪
Feeders with a weighing discharge screw (MULTIFLEX)
▪
Mass flow rate measuring devices and mass flow rate feeders that operate on the basis of the Coriolis
® ®
principle (MULTICOR ) or the principle of inertia (MULTISTREAM )
DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany.

General Diagram
3.2 Some Definitions

The following table shows a list of basic definitions.
Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Dimension Example
I Actual flow rate Material quantity per unit of time Weight/Time kg/h, t/h
I0 Nominal Flow Rate Maximum gravimetric flow rate the Weight/Time kg/h
scale is designed for. Defined in the
P03.02 parameter.
P Flow rate setpoint The preset flow rate that the actual Weight/Time kg/h, t/h
value is controlled against.
Z Flow Rate The material quantity conveyed calcu- Weight kg, t
lated from the integral of the flow rate
over the feed time.
Q The platform load The force that develops by deflecting The mass kg
the bulk solids. with the
same force
of weight
Y Controller actuating variable Conveyor element setpoint Amperage mA
Xd Control deviation The difference between the setpoint percent %
and the actual value with reference to
the rated value
Tab. 1 : Definition for formula symbols
The abbreviations for input and output channels for use in parameterization can be found in chapter Abbrev-
iations.
3.3 Measuring principle

A free flowing stream of bulk solids is diverted in its direction with a solids flow meter. The force required for
diverting is measured and is a measure of the flow rate.
The amount of force is calculated from the theorem of conservation of momentum in physics where the bulk
solids' angle of entry and exit as well as the entry and exit velocity are applied.
The type of diversion and the way the force is recorded depend on the equipment's design type. Here are
two examples:

General Diagram
Fig. 1: The MULTISTREAM measuring principle
Depending upon the type of construction, various installation conditions should be observed that can be
found in any manual of mechanics.
With feed units, the measured mass flow I in control electronics is additionally compared with a preset set-
point P and the PF feeder is controlled so that I = P.
3.4 Automatic control

The weighing electronics equipment can control the material feed into the measuring equipment provided
that the regulation has been activated per parameter P03.01. The controller is turned off with pure measur-
ing systems.
Principle
The targeted and actual flow rate are compared and the difference is fed to a controller. This changes the
flow rate of the PF material feeder until the actual value is equal to the setpoint.
Material feeder
Speed-regulated PF feeders (such as feed screws and starfeeders) require an external power stage. An
external position controller or a switching mechanism for the OPEN and CLOSE directions is needed with
position-controlled feeders (such as flow gates). The equipment supplies the control signal either propor-
tional to the desired volumetric flow or the control commands for opening and closing a motor position-
controlled feeder.
3.5 Control operating modes

The controller can be operated in various modes if the flow rate is regulated by the control. The controller is
turned off per parameter P03.01 Control with pure measuring systems.
The following modes of operation are available to the measuring device.
▪
Gravimetric Mode (regulated)
The actual flow rate is adjusted to the setpoint. The maximum possible setpoint is the same as Nominal
Flow Rate (P03.02). An event message is generated if the input value is too large.
▪
Volumetric Mode (unregulated)
The conveyor element setting is proportional to the flow rate setpoint. Measurement of the actual flow
rate has no effect on the conveyor element adjustment. The flow rate approximately equals the specified
setpoint under nominal conditions.
The setpoint is limited to three times the nominal flow rate. An event message will be generated if this
limit is exceeded.

General Diagram
▪
Volumetric Synchronous Mode (unregulated)
This mode of operation is a special form of volumetric operation. It ensures a seamless transition when
switching from gravimetric to volumetric operation.
3.6 Batching
In batch mode a preset quantity of material is discharged and the feeding is subsequently switched off.
Once the batch setpoint has been reached the batch operation is complete. A subsequent start command to
the feeder will begin a new charge.
Batch filling can be carried out in all modes and variants of operation.
The general procedure for batch operation is shown in the following figure:
Fig. 2: Feeding
The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

0: Start the batch with a preset batch setpoint in units of weight.
1: Interrupt batch operation by switching off the discharge element.
2: Resume the interrupted batch by switching on the feeder.
3: Automatic reduction of the flow rate towards the end of the batch.
4: End automatically once the predetermined batch quantity has been reached.
3.7 Additional Bin Weighers

DISOCONT Tersus can also capture the weight of a bin (called additional containers for the sake of simplifi-
cation). This bin can also be used for controlling and correcting continuous measurement.
This additional bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales. It is used to display
the hopper weight, register and monitor threshold levels and regulate the fill level.
It is often used to record the weight of the bin that is upstream of the continuous measuring or feeding unit in
the route.
The bin weigher is switched on by parameter P22.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES.

- 10 - Schenck Process Group
Operation
4 Operation
The DISOCONT Tersus and an attached weighfeeder can be operated in one of several ways:
▪
Operation under normal circumstances using one or more local VHM operating panels. The features of
the different panel versions can be found in system manual BV-H2406. The sides with the operating di-
alogs are also available via web interface for a browser .
▪
Operation using a higher-order plant control system where the control commands are either exchanged
conventionally by means of binary and analog signals or by means of a fieldbus such as PROFIBUS.
▪
Operation for service work by means of a wireless VHM operating panel.
▪
Operation for service work by EasyServe on a PC/notebook with a cable or wireless access.
▪
Local operation by means of an optional service operating level and the VLG or VMO operating units
specifically for work performed on the mechanism. The special characteristics of this operating panels
can be found in the system manual BV-H2406.
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

Once power is switched on, the DISOCONT Tersus control unit VCU starts up with a self-test. The system
states are indicated by LEDs on the unit. The significance of the indicators can be found in system manual
BV-H2406.
An optional connected VHM operating panel will start up with a self-test of the display once power has been
connected. Subsequently, it establishes communication to the VCU it was connected to last before power
was switched off.
The version number of the device will then appear for a few seconds before being replaced by the normal
display.
Notes:
▪
The following are retained during a power failure:
– Parameter settings
– Setpoints
– The status of all internal counters
– Counting pulses not yet output to external counters
– Date and time
– All important process values
▪
A specific start command is always required to begin feeding.
4.2 Operating and Control Access

DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Type
VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

(permanently installed)
VHM operating panel X VHM touch
(mobile per cable or wireless)
Service operating panel for the X Foil keyboard and display
VMO drive

Schenck Process Group - 11 -
Operation
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Type
Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer

Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard
Service tool X EasyServe
Tab. 2 : Operating access
DANGER
Feeding can be started using the operating panel. This switches the
drives on, allowing bulk material to flow. Before turning it on, the op-
erator has to make sure that turning it on cannot cause any damage.
Interrupting communications when operating on a non-permanent line
(pluggable cable or radio) may cause dangerous situations. There-
fore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved for ser-
vice work only.
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

After a loss of power at the operating panel, it automatically attempts to reconnect with the scale it was con-
nected to before the power loss (after an adjustable waiting period). During this waiting period, the Feeder
operating page can be selected again to select a different scale.
If a connection has already been established, although you want to activate communication to a different
scale, you have to end the existing connection. You can do so after registering yourself as a privileged user
by pressing the Sel. Scale button.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-
established even after several attempts, the operating panel jumps into the configuration dialog.
The procedure for selecting a scales is dependent on the form of communication and is described in the
following chapters.
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable

Preconditions: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the VCU
control unit is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
You have to select the Ethernet channel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the operating pan-
el configuration.
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches in the network for VCU control units
and shows its findings on the Feeder operating page. A button belonging a scale that is displayed is used to
select the scale and establish the data connection.
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth

Conditions: A Bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scales
must be within transmission range. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system ma-
nual.

Operation
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration
of the operator panel.
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for Bluetooth adapters within
range. Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controllers (VCUs). The outcome is
shown on the Feeder [➙ 33] operating page.
Note: A complete search for Bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is
displayed during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown to which no con-
nection can be established, either because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or
they are already otherwise connected.
You can select the scale and establish a data connection by pressing the key belonging to the scale dis-
played. It may take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown
in the header of the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: It can only establish a connection to one scale (assuming the scale is not simultaneously
connected to another Bluetooth adapter). It might be necessary to close the other connection
first. The operating panel will continue to attempt to establish a connection if another connec-
tion already exists.
If Bluetooth is used, the scales to whose Bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only
scales with which communication can be made. The Ethernet destination address may not be changed in
the VHM.
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485

Conditions: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware re-
quirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Commu-
nication Path (Com)).
Once the transmission path has been selected, the operator panel jumps to the feeder [➙ 33] page. This is
where the address of VCU is set. The load digits of the Ethernet address (P19.07) of the scales controller
will be used again for addressing at the RS485 bus.
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communi-
cation can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking next to the ad-
dress number. Otherwise this marking will be red.
You can establish the connection to the scale with the Con.Scale button.
Note: The operating panel is the master on the bus. This is why only one operating panel may be
connected on the bus at any one time.
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet

If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using Ethernet.
Conditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an Ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note: Either use a non-coded socket of the VCU for this connection or a special (yellow) cable
when using the red-coded socket.

Operation
The EasyServe address must be in the same Ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. It might be poss-
ible to adapt the address in the scanner dialog of EasyServe. A scales can also be addressed using a router
if the network has already been configured. The scale address is input manually and not via scanner dialog.
The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The easiest way to select is with the EasyServe Connection | Ethernet (Scanner) item on the menu. This
shows all of the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be adjusted here
and a connection to the scales can be established.
If the scales are connected to a different subnet, they are selected manually using Connection|Ethernet
(Manual)' and entering the scale's IP address.
4.2.2.2 Connection via RS232

RS232 is only used to make a connection in special cases, e.g. when it is not possible to make a connection
via Ethernet. If there is a power failure to a device while a software program is being loaded, it may be ne-
cessary to establish a connection via RS232 to re-load the software.
Conditions: The PC's serial interface (COM) is connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see
system manual BV-H2406.
Connect using the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...'.
38400 baud, 8-O-1 is the only permissible communication format. Select the COM port available at the PC
and the scale's address. The address is stored in parameter P17.01 Own Address in the scales.
Note: A software update via RS232 interface can take as much as 20 minutes. Other functions run
slower than would be usual if the connection was made using Ethernet.
4.2.2.3 Connection via WLAN

We recommend using WLAN to make a wireless connection to a scales.
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem
has been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales.
The PC also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP
address.
In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in
the modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN
access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet
connection were made by cable.
4.2.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth

It is more complicated to establish a connection via Bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be
accessed is the one to whose Bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Conditions: Scales and PC are equipped with Bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:
1 Start the Bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.

2 Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed.
Note: If the name of the scales was changed it will be necessary to restart the PC in order to dis-
play the changed name.
3 Begin establishing a connection with the Bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353

Operation
4 The PC user must enter a Personal Area Network (PAN) once the connection to the Bluetooth
adapter has been established.
5 The address of the Bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by
parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
6 The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other
scales in the network cannot be addressed.
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller

controller (VCU)
Conditions:
▪
The PC is connected to the VCU via Ethernet.
▪
Java is installed on the PC and can be started.
▪
Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to
occur.
Establishing a connection:
The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser address line. This URL is
composed of the following:
http://<address>/hmi/<display factor>.html
Item: Meaning: Possible values:

<address> VCU IP address e.g. 192.168.240.1
<display factor> Display size on the screen start
start_2x
start_3x
start_4x
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
NOTES:
▪
The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel.
▪
The field used to select a different scales and the configuration dialogs for the VHM operating panel
itself are not available.
▪
Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry keyboard is not shown on the screen.
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU)

The scales controller is equipped with a web server that provides the scale with a homepage. This is only
available in English.
Conditions: The PC can establish an Ethernet connection to the VCU.
Establishing the connection: The IP address of the VCU must be entered into the browser address line.

Operation
Various data from the scales controller can be called up on the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry Function
HMI Opens at a different size the same controller interface as is in the operating panel.
HMI_2x Also refer to: Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) [➙ 15]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events Memory of the most recent events (such as alarms or warnings, etc.)
Parameter changes Memory of the most recent changes in parameters
Command log Logs a list of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values are also available
on the VHM operating panel.
The minute of saving the data is set after the full hour in P31.01.
Totalizer daily Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters
The time of saving from 00:00 h is set in P31.02.
Totalizer Table of totalizing integrators / counters saved on the command
DataLogger 1 Table of the measured values recorded. The sampling interval can be set using
DataLogger 2 P31.03. The up to 10 process variables that can be recorded are selected using
P31.04 P31.13. It begins recording when activating in the Mode operating range.
Tab. 3 : Function calls on the scales controller homepage
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are keyed in stating the entry time. The entries in the
tables are only up-dated when they are called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with
standard programs using select-copy-paste.

Operation
4.3 VHM operating panel

The DISOCONT Tersus system can be equipped with an optional VHM operating panel.
The operating panel is equipped with a touch-sensitive display (i.e., touch screen). The buttons shown
change dynamically depending on the state of the system. The keys are activated by touching the screen. A
touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used.
The following figure shows the structure of the user interface (front view) if it is in communication with a VCU
control unit.
Fig. 3: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display
1 Name of device being controlled 5 Select details and operating keys
2 Field for event messages 6 Field for measured values and graphics
3 Select work field 7 Command and edit keys
4 On and off keys 8 Symbol indicating running operation
The [HOME] button is used to select the basic view.

Notes:
▪
VHM VCU The operating panel works in the Configuration Mode as long as it is NOT in
communication with a scale. Then the [Feeder] buttons are offered in the ‘Se-
lect the Workspace’ (3) range for selecting a scale and [Con. Scale] for estab-
lishing the connection to the scale selected.
Also refer to the 'Operating and Control Access' Chapter.
▪
The communication to a scale has to be interrupted for adjustments to the
display such as brightness and adjusting the touch-sensitive screen. You can
call up the adjustment dialogs for the operating panel with the [Sel. Scale] but-
ton.

Operation
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device

The name of the scales to which the operating panel currently has a data connection is shown in the head-
er. The name is set as a parameter (P02.03) in the device.
4.3.1.2 Event messages

The system performs various tests. An event will be identified if there are any deviations from normal oper-
ating conditions. The way in which the device reacts to such an event can be set by parameter. The event
appears in the field for event messages.
For example:
IL06 (W1) Event: Not Ready for Start
The variables have the following significance:
IL06 Explicit, language-independent identifier for the event

W1 Event class
Event: Not Ready for Start Explanatory text
The following event classes can occur:

Class System status Display
A ALARM: Serious error. Text against a red back-
Drives had to be shut down. ground.
This message must be acknowledged before it can be cleared and the Blinking: not acknowledged
drives restarted.
Static: acknowledged
W1 WARNING 1: Irregular operation. Text against a yellow back-
This could indicate a serious error. ground.
The event did not stop material conveying. Acknowledge the message to Blinking: not acknowledged
clear it.
Static: acknowledged
W2 WARNING 2: Irregular operation.
This could indicate a serious error.
The event did not stop material conveying. The message will be cleared
automatically once the event is no longer pending.
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range

The selection on the right provides the following operating fields:
Field Function User
HOME Operation and display for normal operation System operating personnel
Trend Shows the transient behavior of process signals System operating personnel
Service personnel
Values Process and measured values System operating personnel
Service personnel
Setup Special displays and operation for setup, diagnostics Service personnel
and service

Operation
Field Function User

Login Login for privileged access Service personnel
Help Indication of program versions; System operating personnel
Cleaning the monitor display Service personnel
Sel. Scale Connect to a different scales Service personnel
Some functions are not available to non-privileged users. Beyond this, access to some func-
tions can be switched off per parameter.
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation

The feeder drive can be switched on and off with the keys in this field if the mode of operation and the pa-
rameterization permit it.
WARNING
A start signal will actuate the motors!
There is a risk of injury to people standing within range of the motors. Bulk
material can be transported and may overwhelm downstream components.
The stop signal is not an emergency stop, but rather will stop the facility
normally.
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection

Different screens in a work field can be selected by using the keys in the lower area. The key used often to
acknowledge event messages is available in most displays. Further pages can be called up with the arrow
keys. Key allocation varies between the fields. An overview of the function tree can be seen in section Op-
erating Fields and Function Calls [➙ 20].
Access to individual functions can be limited when setting up the system to privileged user groups.
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics

Depending on the page selected, current measured values and graphical representations of the mechanical
system and signals are displayed here. Input boxes, e.g. for a setpoint or parameter value, are shown
'recessed'.
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys

Other buttons can be overlaid for special functions in area (7) above the lower detail selection (5). The keys
shown vary with the detail selection in the respective work field. The function of these keys is described in
the relative function sections.
4.3.1.8
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation
The symbol for a running feed in the upper-left corner indicates the state of the main drive. A rotating rec-
tangle will be displayed when device is switched on. This symbol appears on all display pages.

Operation
4.3.2 Operating Fields and Function Calls

The following table lists the location of the most important displays and operating functions.
Work area Detail selecti- Function Display and operation
on
HOME Initial screen Normal operation for continuous feeding or batch operation. Entry of feed rate and
batch setpoints.
Mode Rate Control Switch between gravimetric and volumetric operation.
Batching Only if batch operation is activated by parameter: select and
deselect batch operation.
Discharge Select and deselect discharge operation for the feed hopper.
Filling Start and stop manual filling of the feed hopper.
Data Logging Start and end logging of process data. Clear the memory.
Keyboard Mode Select and deselect keyboard mode.
Caution: Under certain circumstances system control com-
mands may no longer work in keyboard mode.
Batching Only if batch mode is selected: display for batch operation. Entry of the batch setpoint.
Totals Display of the flow rate integrators. Reset the measured amount.
Ack Event Acknowledges identified events.
Caution: The cause of the event must be corrected before the event is acknowl-
edged.
Trend Initial screen Shows the transient behavior of the configured signals. The keys <<, <, >, >>, Z - and
Z + are used to select the section to be displayed.
Settings Configuration of the running signals to be displayed as per separate specifications.
Values Act. Values Tabular display of selected measured values. The values are selected by parameter.
Total Log Shows a list of the counter readings logged either hourly or daily. The counter read-
ings can also be read via the web server.
Event Log Shows the logged events and operating commands.
Param Log Shows the logged parameter changes.
Totals Shows the current state of the totalizing counter. Counters 1 and 2 can be reset with
the Reset keys.
Setup Initial screen Parallel display of two selectable process values.
Parameter Selection Displays a selection of parameters.
For privileged users: change the parameter values.
All Read access for all parameters.
For privileged users: change the parameter values. A description
of the operation can be found in a separate section.
Calibration For privileged users: open and operate the system setup and control programs as per
separate specifications.
Set Time Displays the time. Events are logged with the time of occurrence.
For privileged users: set the time.
Custom For privileged users: load the application-specific parameter set.
Factory For privileged users: load the parameter set with the factory settings.
Simulation For privileged users: start simulation of the external circuit for test run.

Operation
Work area Detail selecti- Function Display and operation

on
Login For privileged users: login to and logoff from the control. Permit access to configuration. The default
Logout password can be found in the description of the parameters for P02.12 and P02.13.
Help Initial screen Displays the controller and operating panel program versions.
Clean: Deactivates the touchscreen for cleaning purposes. Normal mode will be returned to in
20 seconds.
Sel. Scale Exit the current screen showing the currently connected scales and establish a data connection to a
different scales.
Tab. 4 : Work areas and functions
NOTE: Certain functions are available only to privileged users. The specific user must log on using the key-
word-protected function 'Login' in order to access them. The keyword entered is compared with a variable
key (P02.13 and P02.12) stored in the controller.
Protected functions will show up gray for non-privileged users.
4.3.3 Authorization for Control Commands

There are many ways to restrict the entry of control commands to certain users only. The system supports
setting special conditions using a range of methods.
4.3.3.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation

The scales are usually operated in normal operation during production. The entry points (sources) for
operation under normal conditions are determined by parameter. The scales can be turned on and setpoints
altered from these sources only.
Parameters Name and signal

P04.01 Feeder Start
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source
Tab. 5 : Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation
Sources for operation under normal conditions can be set for entry at the scales operating panel during ser-
vice work. This mode is called keyboard mode. The VHM operating panel and the analog operating soft-
ware that can be started via a web browser from the scales control homepage are considered to be operat-
ing panels. In keyboard mode the service software tool 'EasyServe' can also be used to control the scales.
4.3.3.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Moni-
Moni-
toring
The system can be configured so that normal operation is accessible only to devices with IP addresses that
have been specified by parameters. The corresponding parameters can be found in the parameter group
'Dialog Behaviour' (P02.04 … P02.10).
Operation via 'EasyServe' is not affected by the parameter setting.
The connection to the operating devices with specified addresses can be monitored so that the scales can
be returned to a safe state in case of a malfunction.

Operation
4.3.3.3 Access to Special Functions

Access to special functions can be restricted by parameters. The following alternatives can be selected by
these parameters grouped according to control command:
'active' Command not restricted. The command may always be called up at the scales
operating panel.
'not active' This command is never allowed. The relevant key is not shown at the operating
panel making it impossible to execute the command.
'Password' This command is accessible only after logging on with password 1. Password 1
is variable and can be changed using P02.12.
This password is principally intended for service access. The basic system set-
tings are always made using this password.
'2nd Password' This command is accessible only after logging on with password 2. Password 2
is variable and can be changed using P02.13.
The parameters for defining access authorizations are in the group of Dialog Behaviour (P02.14 ... P02.21)
parameters. If the user has not registered with sufficient privileges for the desired function, the operating
button appears as non-active (grey) with a star in the lower right-hand corner.
The operating company is responsible for assuring that the passwords are known to those personnel only
who are to receive authorization for the respective control command. The control functions are released
once the user has logged on with the Login key and has entered the password. The Logout key should be
used to log off the privileged user from the system once work has been completed. The unit falls back by
itself into the non-privileged operating mode after the time set on the operating panel (refer to Setting the
Display [➙ 33]) .
However, the control commands can always be executed via EasyServe regardless of the
parameter setting.
4.3.4 Basic Operating Functions

This section will describe operation under normal conditions.
Access to certain operating functions can be restricted when setting up the system. They will then be no
longer accessible or accessible with a keyword only. This chapter will describe the complete and unre-
stricted functional range.
4.3.4.1 Switch Feeding On/Off

Condition
▪
No alarm may be pending.
▪
The all-clear must be given by discharging elements, in as far as any are connected. Event IL-01 Event:
Run Disabled will be sent if no all-clear is given.
▪
The on switch at the operating panel must be activated. This is the case in keyboard or in normal mode
if the source of the on pulse in P04.01 has been set to 'OP'.
Turning on feeding
▪
Press the ON key.

Operation
Display during running feed

▪
Running arrow in the graphical display.
▪
ON appears in the graphical display.
▪
A moving symbol appears in the upper left border.
Turning off feeding
▪
Press the OFF key.
Scales will be switched off. Flow rate measurement will cease after the time set in parameter P06.02 has
elapsed.
Display during stopped feed
OFF appears in the graphical display. Moving displays are turned off.
4.3.4.2 Set setpoint

Condition
▪
Keyboard mode selected, or
▪
Normal mode selected and P04.02 = 'OP'
The setpoint will be displayed in a data-entry frame if it can be altered.
How to Enter the Setpoint
1. Call up the HOME operating page.
2. Press the entry frame, the entry field will open.
3. Clear the old value with the [C] button and key in the value.
4. Complete entry by pressing OK or exit by pressing EXIT.
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.02 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.4.3 Relative Setpoint

With the relative setpoint Pr, an externally set setpoint Pe can be expressed as a percent. This function is
used to enter a portion of additives, with the command variable being measured.
Conditions
The P04.07 parameter = AI or OP
The effective setpoint for the control is calculated using the following formula:
P = Pe × Pr / 100 %
P = effective setpoint
Pe = External setpoint
Pr = Relative setpoint
It is entered the same way as an absolute setpoint (Set setpoint [➙ 23]).

Operation
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.02 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.4.4
4.3.4.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter
The DISOCONT Tersus has three totalizing counters that sum up the measured quantity of bulk solids. Of
them, counters 1 and 2 can be directly set to zero. Counter 3 cannot be reset. The counters do not have any
independent overflow.
How to reset a totalizing counter
Press the Totals button, then press the button for zero setting the desired counter and confirm the com-
mand.
HINT
Other ways to reset the counters
The system can also be configured to allow the counters to be reset by
means of an electrical signal. It is still possible to reset the counters from
the system host computer via fieldbus interface. All reset commands work
independently of one another.
4.3.4.5 Acknowledging Event Messages

All of the important functions are monitored. An event message is generated if a malfunction occurs. This
will be displayed in the message field. The event with the highest priority will be displayed if several events
should occur.
The order of priorities is: Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2).
HINT
Displaying earlier events
Select the 'Values' screen and 'Event Log' to display earlier events. Earlier
events can be called up using the navigation keys in the event field. The list
of events can also be viewed via web server and can be exported for an
external evaluation.

Operation
How to Acknowledge an Error Message
DANGER
Event messages indicate unusual and/or dangerous states.
For reasons of safety, the causes of any malfunctions must be corrected
before an event message is acknowledged.
To acknowledge an event message, press the 'Ack Event' key that is available on many screens such as in
'HOME'. Once acknowledged, any blinking messages will be displayed continuously. When the cause of the
event has been corrected, the message will be cleared from the message line, although it can be displayed
again using EreignisLog.
A troubleshooting list can be found in section Event Messages.
4.3.5 Special Operating Functions

This section will describe the functions used for normal operation in special cases. If not stated otherwise,
the text will assume that the work field HOME has been selected (Selecting the operating range [➙ 18]).
4.3.5.1 Trend
The trend is a graphical depiction on the VHM operating panel of the course of process values over time.
HINT
It is easier with EasyServe
EasyServe allows you to adjust trend depictions much more comfortably
and to export measured data. The trend in the VHM is intended to offer
permanent and simple trend depiction.
The trend depiction, stored values from previous weighings and the configuration of the trend will be deleted
if the operating panel suffers a power failure or if it connects to a different scales.
Button Function
<< Open older values into the display window, large increments
< Open older values into the display window, small increments
> Open more recent values into the display window, small increments
>> Open more recent values into the display window, large increments
Settings Enter the configuration dialog (see below)
Z- Increase time period shown
Z+ Decrease time period shown
Tab. 6 : Control keys

Operation
Setting the Trend Display

The configuration window appears after 'Settings' is pressed.
Fig. 4: Lines configuration
The process values selected for display are shown in the left table (1). The first time it is called up the list
will be empty.
In order to configure the display of a value, click on the value in table 1 to select it. This will show the value's
reference number (ID), its thresholds and the color of the line. Touching fields (3) to (5) will open the corres-
ponding adjustment dialog box.
Button Function
Remove Delete the values selected in (1) and (2).
Back Close the configuration window and return to the trend display. Altered settings will not
be activated.
Update Activate the configuration shown for the trend depiction.
Add Open the dialog to select the value to be displayed.
Tab. 7 : Keys in the lines configuration

Operation
Fig. 5: Selection dialog for process values
Click on a value in list (5) to select it. The properties of the trend line are transferred to the right-hand col-
umn, the reference number (ID) shown in field (4).
The value is transferred with the keys 'Add' or 'New' into list 1 of the values to be displayed.
Process value ID Process variable Dimension
1872 Measured actual flow rate kg/h

1874 Totalizing counter 1 kg
1876 Totalizing counter 2 kg
1890 Surge hopper fill level kg
1894 Effective setpoint kg/h
1904 Control deviation % of rated capacity
Tab. 8 : Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5)
The characteristic value (ID) of any given process value can be entered in ID field (4). Possible values can
be found in the fieldbus data description. The 'Back' key closes the window in which values are selected and
returns to the value configuration menu.
4.3.5.2 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF

You can use the Keyboard mode function place the preselected operating sources for switching on/off, for
specifying the setpoint and the source for the batch setpoint onto the keyboard of the VHM operating panel.
The previous sources will take effect if keyboard mode is deactivated. Since operating via Easy-
Serve corresponds to operating with the keyboard on the operating unit, this switch also has an impact on
operating via EasyServe.
Note: When switching to keyboard from an external source (e.g. serial fieldbus), the ON/OFF status of the
scales, the setpoint and the batch setpoint are maintained. The external signals are effective when switching
in the opposite direction.

Operation
How to set up keyboard mode

Pressing the Mode buttons, changing to the second display page via arrow key and Keyboard mode there.
Display
The ON, OFF' buttons and the setpoint input space are visible in the keyboard mode. These fields are only
visible in normal mode if the operating sources have been set to the operating panel (OP).
4.3.5.3 Cleaning and Testing the Display

The touchscreen is deactivated for a set period of time to allow the display to be cleaned. No acidic or
strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used. During cleaning, a clock will count down from 20 seconds to
zero. The screen will remain white during this time with the exception of the progress indicator. This allows
defective pixels to be spotted. The touchscreen will be automatically reactivated once the time has elapsed.
How to initiate cleaning mode
Press the 'Help' key followed by 'Clean:'.
4.3.5.4 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors')

The event with the highest priority will permanently be displayed in the corresponding display line. Press the
'Values' key followed by 'Event Log' to display older events or events of lower priority. Other events can then
be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of events is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comfortably displayed or
downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries
(in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.5.5 Display Stored Counter Readings

The readings of the totalizing counters can be stored cyclically. The stored values are available as a at the
operating panel and in list form in the web browser.
Press the Values button and then Total Log button display them on the operating panel. Individual entries
can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many
entries have already been made).
4.3.5.6 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations.

Press the Values button and then the Param Log button to show changes in parameters. Previous altera-
tions can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of parameter alterations is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comforta-
bly displayed or downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the
previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.5.7 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation

The measured values of the additional bin weigher are displayed in a separate screen. It is only possible to
display this when the bin weigher is activated via P22.01 Bin Weigher Active.
To open the display:
Press the Surge Bin button.
You can not only see the current bin weight, but also the limits set per parameter. The parameters can be
adapted right on the screen if you register with sufficient privileges.

Operation
Parameters No. Meaning

Bin Level MAX P22.18 Upper threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if exceeded.
Control Level MAX P22.13 Fill level at which the filling will be stopped.
Control Level MIN P22.12 Filling is started if the fill level falls below this threshold.
Bin Level MIN P22.15 Lower threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if level falls
below this level.
Tab. 9 : Bin weigher parameters
Button Effect
Auto The filling is regulated automatically by means of the threshold values 'Control Level MIN'
and 'Control Level MAX' set.
Manual The filling of the hopper is controlled by the operator using the keys 'Start' and 'Stop'. For
reasons of safety filling is automatically stopped if the limit 'Control Level MAX' is ex-
ceeded.
Start Begin filling the hopper.
Stop End filling the hopper.
Tab. 10 : Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level
Refer to Adjustment Functions for information on adjusting the bin weigher.
4.3.6 Service Functions

The functions described here are as a rule used only for system setup, troubleshooting or to alter the control
properties.
Some functions are accessible only to privileged users who have logged onto the controller (also refer to:
Operating Fields and Function Calls [➙ 20]).
4.3.6.1 Display Parameter Alterations

Changes made to parameters are archived in the system. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Param Log' to
display the stored values. Previous values can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
4.3.6.2 Reading and Setting Parameters

The control program was structured such that no programing knowledge is necessary to adapt the system to
local conditions. Parameters define the properties. The meaning of the parameters can be found in the de-
tailed parameter description in section 'Parameters'.
Call up: Setup button and then Parameter button
Parameters that require frequent changes due to bulk material changes are summarized in Selection.
You can access all parameters via All.
The parameters are structured in blocks to give a better overview. parameters are composed as follows:
Pxx.yy <Text>, where: xx: Block number

yy: Number of the parameter in the block
<Text> Explanatory name of the parameter (language-dependent)

Operation
Depending on the situation, individual parameters or groups of parameters may be faded

out to highlight the parameters important to an application. Hidden parameters can only be
shown via EasyServe and activated there for the display on the VHM operating panel whe-
rever necessary. The fading out may result in breaks in the numbering. Some parameters
can be write protected. The write protection can also be configured using EasyServe.
NOTE: The following description applies to a visible and write unprotected parameter accessed by a user
with sufficient user privileges.
The parameter group is displayed and selected in the upper part of display area 6 (see VHM operating pan-
el [➙ 17]). Use the arrow keys to scroll through the groups. Individual parameters in a group can be se-
lected in the lower half of display area 6.
A parameter can be selected directly with the keyboard symbol.
The value of the parameter is shown in display area 7 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 17]) of the command
and edit keys.
The Edit button calls up the dialog for changing the selected parameters. The parameter's identifier will ap-
pear in the focus of the upper part of display area 6 and its current value in the lower part. Depending on the
type of parameter the arrow keys can be used either to assign a new value to the parameter or a value can
be entered for it. A changed value is written into the parameter via Store resident. An alternative is discard-
ing the change with the Exit or Back button. In the latter case the parameter value will remain unchanged.
4.3.6.3 Setting the Clock

DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues run-
ning for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The
clock buffer is maintenance-free.
The time is recorded in the process value logs.
How to set the clock:
Press the Setup button and then Set Time.
The current values for date and time appear in display space 6 (refer to VHM operating panel [➙ 17]).
Touch the entry field to open an entry dialog. Either touch the screen or use the arrow keys to move the
cursor in the entry field. Finish the procedure and change the time with [OK]. The dialog is exited via Cancel
without changing the clock.
4.3.6.4 Reset to Factory Settings

DISOCONT Tersus has three independent sets of parameters:
Parameter set Usage Load procedure at the operating panel.
Active parameter set Set controller behaviour Individual parameter values can be altered (see
Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 29]).
Backup set Pre-prepared parameter set for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Custom'
certain applications or settings you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
after commissioning meter set.
Factory settings Unalterable set of parameters for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Factory'
the basic configuration you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
meter set.
Tab. 11 : Parameter sets: Usage and activation

Operation
WARNING
Irretrievable loss of adjusted parameters
Loading the backup parameter set or the factory settings will overwrite all of
the parameters in the active parameter set. The overwrite cannot be re-
versed. We recommend you to use EasyServe to save a copy of the cur-
rent parameter set to the PC drive before overwriting.
4.3.6.5 Simulation Mode

For commissioning, the DISOCONT Tersus can simulate important process values for training and test pur-
poses without starting aggregates and without requiring all sensors to be connected. Load and speed values
are simulated internally.
WARNING
Output signals are set in simulation mode. This allows externally
connected motors to start. The system will show that material is flow-
ing.
The starting motors may represent a hazard. The on signal can activate
systems upstream of the feeder whether the feeder is prepared to receive
the bulk material or not.
Selecting simulation mode with a sequence of keys:

[Setup], [right arrow], [Simulation]
4.3.6.6 Access to calibration functions

The preferred manner of adapting the system to the special properties of the scales and bulk materials is by
using the adjustment functions provided. The adjustment assistant is used to change quickly the bulk ma-
terial. An individual selection of the adjustment program is used to make the basic settings.
4.3.6.6.1 Operating the calibration

calibration functions
DISOCONT Tersus offers a range of calibration functions to facilitate commissioning and changing bulk
material. All functions are operated according to the same principles. The Adjustment Functions Chapter
summarizes the individual functions, what is required for them and their results.
To call up: Press the 'Setup' key followed by 'Calibration' and 'Programs “
Use the arrow keys to select and display the name of the program in the upper part of display area 6 (see
VHM operating panel [➙ 17]). Operating information will also appear here.
Further information and program results are shown in the lower part of the display area.
The keys in area 7 of the display are used for operation (see VHM operating panel [➙ 17]).

Operation
Button Function
Start Run the selected program
Apply Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
Cancel Discard the results and abort the program. Programs can be aborted at any time.
Tab. 12 : Keys for the calibration programs
4.3.7 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel

The operating panel configuration is autonomous of the scales configuration. The operating panel has a
proprietary set of parameters stored in the operating panel itself only. These parameters can be accessed
by means of a special dialog. User prompts in the configuration dialog are always in English, regardless of
the language set for the scales.
4.3.7.1 Accessing the Configuration

Once power to the system has been switched on, the operating panel will show 'VHM-SPG' in the headline
of the display. Open the operating panel configuration dialog by pressing any key other than [Con.Scales].
▪
Alternatively: If the operating panel is already displaying a scales' operating pages, the configuration
dialog can be opened with the 'Sel. Scale' key without requiring the supply voltage to be switched off
and on (Operating Fields and Function Calls [➙ 20]).
The adjustment ranges are called up with the keys in area 3 [➙ 18] of the display. Some functions are
accessible only to privileged users.
Button Function Password
protected
VHM addr. Set the VHM IP address Yes

Display Set the display parameters Yes
Feeder Select the scales to which a connection is to be established
Config Detailed adjustment of the scales' web server homepage Yes
Com Set the path for communication with the scales Yes
Calibration Adjust touchscreen entry
Login Login for privileged users
Con.Scales Connect to a scales
Help Display software version
Disable touchscreen to clean display
Tab. 13 : Keys in the VHM configuration dialog
4.3.7.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.)

Every device in the communication network must have a unique address. The VHM address is set in the
configuration dialog with the key 'VHM addr.'. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 35].

Operation
Field Meaning Factory settings
IP Unique IP address in the scales controller subnetwork 192.168.240.21

(VCU).
The last group of digits in the IP address is also the unit's
address when communicating through the local bus.
Subnet Subnetwork template 255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address of the gateway to other networks 0.0.0.0
Tab. 14 : Fields for setting the address
4.3.7.3 Setting
Setting the Display
The 'Display' key opens the dialog for adjusting the display settings. The key is accessible only to a user
with privileged access [➙ 35].
Button Parameter Function Factory settings

Inactivity Inactivity ti- Length of time from the most recent activity until the bright- 20 min
timeout meout ness of the screen is automatically reduced. The screen will
return to normal brightness once the screen is touched. This
contact will not be interpreted as communication with the
scales.
Logout timeout Length of time from the most recent entry before a privileged 600 min
user is automatically logged out of the system security rea-
sons.
Working Display brightness during operation. At full brightness the display has a life expectancy of approximately
brightness 5 years. This expectancy can be increased to over 10 years by dimming the brightness a little.
Sleeping Brightness after a longer period with no activity.
brightness Note: If the display touchscreen is not to be used and the display is intended to be permanently fully
legible, the sleeping brightness can be set to the same level as the operating brightness.
Save Save the changes made. Changes are discarded without prompting if they were not saved beforehand.
Tab. 15 : Parameters for the display
4.3.7.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder)

(Feeder)
The display shows the scales available in the network. Scales are selected by means of its corresponding
key.
Button Function
Buttons beside Select the scales
an entry
Configure Configure the scales by entering:
Scales name
IP address
Subnetwork mask
Gateway
Note: This functions allows the IP address of a VCU to be set without using EasyServe. The
addresses of the VHM and the VCU are generally in the same subnetwork.
The 'Back' key will discard the changes.
The 'Save' key will save the changes.
Tab. 16 : Keys in the list of scales

Operation
4.3.7.5 Set the Homepage (Config)

As with a web browser, the homepage of the scales' user interface must also be specified. The key is ac-
cessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 35].
Parameter / Key Function Factory settings
URL of homepage Address of the scales' web server homepage. A web http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
browser on a PC can open the scales' user interface
at this address.
Under normal circumstances the scales are selected
on the 'Feeder' page. The start address is entered
automatically.
Communication will be automatically established to
the last address entered here once power resumes
after a power failure.
Start timeout Length of time between command to connect to a 7s
scales and the start of connection. This period can
be used to access the operating panel configuration
[➙ 32].
Save Save the settings. The entries are discarded if they
are not saved before the page is left.
Tab. 17 : Setting startup routine
4.3.7.6 Configuring
Configuring the Communication Path (Com)
Select the medium of communication here. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 35].
Selection Function Remarks Factory settings
Ethernet Communication via Ethernet interface and The complete IP address of the x
the RJ45 plug. scales will be used when selected.
Bluetooth Communication via Bluetooth will be auto- All Bluetooth adapters within range
matically activated if a Bluetooth adapter is are listed in the 'Feeder' selection.
connected (wireless interface for portable Each scales must be equipped with its
devices). own adapter. Scales connected to
each other via Ethernet can commu-
nicate via Bluetooth only to the scales
to whose adapter the operating panel
has been connected.
A subordinate IP connection is estab-
lished in a separate subnetwork.
Therefore the IP subnetwork address
displayed in the VHM differs from the
scales' subnetwork address stored in
the parameter.
RS485 Communication via serial interface The last part of the scales' IP address
(1 ... 254) will be used when selected.
The IP address must therefore also
be set when using an interface of this
kind.
Tab. 18 : Alternatives
The select scales page will automatically open if the communication path is changed. The scales stores its
addresses in a parameter.
Details on possible alternative cablings of operating panel and scales are described in the system manual
BV-H2406.

Operation
4.3.7.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen

The touch sensitive screen is calibrated in relation to the display using this function. Calibration is required if
a key is unintentionally depressed when a neighboring key is touched or if a function can only be activated
by pressing the area next to the key on the screen.
Once the 'Start' button has been pressed, you will be prompted to touch points on the screen marked with a
cross. The calibration will be automatically stored once this has been successfully performed. The proce-
dure is automatically repeated if faults are identified during the adjustment.
The adjustment is always called up during the start procedure once the software is loaded into the VHM.
Note:
A touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used. The adjustment
should be made with an object that is as similar as possible to the one that will be used in subsequent nor-
mal operation.
4.3.7.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout)

Some of the operating panel settings are protected against unauthorized access. Access is available only to
users with access privileges.
The keyword is: 7353
The keyword cannot be changed and is independent of the scales' keyword settings.
4.3.7.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale)

The operating panel will begin working normally once communication has been established to a scales. The
operating panel will wait [➙ 34] for a period after the 'Con.Scale' key is pressed and then try via the confi-
gured path [➙ 34] to connect to the scales that was selected on the 'Feeder' [➙ 33] page. The attempt will
be repeated several times. If the scales cannot be reached at that address the program will branch to the
'Feeder' scales selection.
The connection attempt can be interrupted by pressing another key and the configuration dialog for the op-
erating panel can be called up again. The routine is also called up if the system is restarted after a power
failure.
4.3.7.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information

The key 'Help' opens a window with information on the software version and with basic scales controller
settings 'Feeder' (VCU) and operating panel settings 'VHM'. These data and if possible the Easy-
Serve parameter file should be kept at hand if making an inquiry to Schenck Process.
The serial number of the controller VCU also appears in the EasyServe scanner. It can be used to identify
the VCU in the network if erroneous, non-unique IP addresses have been assigned.
'FCB Variant:' is the designation for the loaded variant of the function block links [➙ 240]. 'FCB Variant:'
'Empty' refers to the state with no expanded functions, which is the state described in this manual.
The 'Clean:' key switches the operating panel into cleaning mode for a short time. A counter will appear on
the display and count down the time remaining until the panel returns to normal. Touch entry is deactivated,
allowing the screen to be touched for cleaning without inadvertently giving a command.

Operation
4.4 Calibration programs

DISOCONT Tersus simplifies start-up with the aid of calibration functions. They store their findings in para-
meters, thus adapting the control to the application. All parameters that arise from the design of the scales
and the electrical connections must be set before the calibration functions are called up.
As a rule the calibration functions are accessible only to privileged users. They first have to register in the
system (Operating Fields and Function Calls [➙ 20]). The calibration functions can be called up both on the
VHM operating panel (Operating the calibration functions [➙ 31]) and via EasyServe. They can also be
operated via the fieldbus connection, in as far as one has been activated (P18.01).
4.4.1 Taring the flowthrough measurement

The 'TW: Tare' calibration program records the load on the load cell without flowing bulk solids through the
time (Factory: 30 s) that can be adjusted in P10.05. This value is used to correct the measuring results in
operation with bulk solids. The flow rate display fluctuates around zero after taring.
In contrast to the zero setting program, the zero setting range is not monitored or limited with taring. The
tare program deletes the findings of the the zero setting program.
Condition The flowthrough meter has to be switched off. This closes any material feeder.
Batching operation may not be active.
To call up Call up the 'TW: Tare' calibration program
Program runtime The runtime is determined by P10.05
display when running The program's remaining running time in % of the value in P10.05
The tare measured in percent of the value in P05.05
Display when finished The tare deviation with reference to the previous tare of P10.02 in % of P10.02
Recently determined tare in % of the load cell rated capacity (P05.05)
Parameters changed New value of tare in P10.02
when results are accepted The P10.03 parameters will be set to zero
Potential events and 'Stop !': Switch off feeding (feeder) (refer to the conditions)
messages 'Aborted !': One condition was not met during the measurement and the calibration pro-
gram was ended.
'Batch active': Reject batching for calibration (refer to the conditions)
Tab. 19 : The details and course
4.4.2 Flowthrough measurement zero setting

The '>0< Zero Set' program calibrates the zero point of flow rate measurement just like the 'TW: Tare' pro-
gram. The results are ascertained relative to the basic adjustment and cannot be accepted if the deviation
from the basic adjustment is greater than the limit set in P10.04.
Condition The mass flow metering unit has to be turned off. This closes any material feeder.
To call up Call up the '>0< Zero Set' calibration program
display when running >0< active: The program's remaining running time in % of the value in P10.05

Operation
The deviation of tare from the basic adjustment in % of the value in P05.05
Display when finished The tare deviation with reference to the previous tare of P10.02 in % of P10.02
Recently determined tare in % of the load cell rated capacity (P05.05)
Parameters changed The new value of the tare correction in P10.03
when results are accepted
gram was ended.
4.4.3 Weight check flowthrough meter

The 'CW: Span Calibration' calibration program records the load on the load cell through the time (Facto-
ry: 30 s) that can be set in P10.05 without flowing bulk solids, but with the calibration weight applied. The
result is compared to a preset setpoint and then displayed. This makes it possible to identify shunt forces
and sluggishness in the weighing mechanism. The precise position of the calibration weight with reference
to the fulcrum is decisive in equipment that records the torque. The load Qm on the load cell is calculated
from the load CW applied and the leverage a/b of the horizontal distances of Qm and CW from the fulcrum.
This can only be manually corrected since the results depend on the care applied when placing the calibra-
tion weight which is why a plausibility check should always be made.
Note: Unfortunately, design of some flowthrough meters does not allow placing a calibration weight
on them which is why the 'CW: Span Calibration' control program does not provide any usa-
ble findings in these cases. As a substitute, the findings of the 'TW: Tare' calibration program
can be evaluated in relation to previously determined values. The reference values can be
determined at start-up or without any faults without a flow of bulk solids. We can conclude
from departures of less than 10 % of the load cell rated capacity that there is material build-
up in the meter. Departures of more than 10 % indicate defects in the load cell or data acqui-
sition.
Condition The flowthrough meter has to be switched off. This closes any material feeder.
The calibration weight has to be keyed in with the value in P10.07 having an impact on the
load cell. It might be necessary to pay attention to the leverage.
To call up Call up the 'CW: Span Calibration' calibration program
Display when running The program's remaining running time in % of the value in P10.05
Set/Act: weight in P10.07/measured weight

Operation
Display when finished The measured calibration weight

Set/Act: weight in P10.07/measured weight
Parameters changed -
This can be corrected manually in P10.01:
P10.01 new = P10.01 old * Set/Act
gram was ended.
4.4.4 Taring the bin weigher

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P22.01.
The TB: Tare calibration program records the load on the weighing equipment for the empty bin. In opera-
tion with bulk solids, this value is subtracted from the measured bin weight. When the bin is empty, the dis-
play of the weight value fluctuates around zero after taring.
The details and course of the calibration program:
Condition The bin should be empty.

The bin filling may not be activated.
To call up Select and start the TB: Tare calibration program
Program runtime 10 s
display when running 'TB: active': the program's remaining time
The current tare load in percent of P22.04
Display when finished Deviation in percent of the rated load cell load as per P22.04
Tare in percent of the rated load cell load as per P22.04
Parameters changed New value of tare in P22.25
when results are accepted
Potential events and 'Aborted !' :

messages The program was aborted. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 22 : The details and process of taring for the bin weigher
4.4.5 Bin weight control

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P22.01.
The CB: Weight Check calibration program is used for checking and adjusting the weighing equipment with
the aid of a known calibration weight. The mass of the calibration weight used should be keyed into P22.25
before program start.
This program can identify shunt forces, i.e. links between the weighed and static components that absorb
forces that cannot be captured with the load cell.

Operation
Condition The bin may not be filled or emptied.

The mass of the calibration weight was entered into P22.25.
To call up Select and start the CB: Weight Check calibration program
Program runtime
display when running The first thing is calculating the bin's current weight.
The display of the remaining period and current weight.
Then the Checkweight Up/Down prompt and value of the calibration weight appear.
Now apply or remove the calibration weight and press the <<Next>> button.
The display of the remaining period and the difference to the first weight value. The value
shown is negative if the calibration weight has been removed.
The second weight value is now taken and checked for plausibility.
Display when finished Set/Act shows the quotient from the change in mass entered in P22.25 and the measured
change in mass.
Parameters changed Enter in P22.24
when results are accepted P22.24new = P22.24old * 'Set/Act'
Potential events and Aborted !:

messages The program was finished. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 23 : The details and process of checking the weight of the bin weigher
4.4.6 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation

This function is only available when weight calculation has been activated for the bin via P22.01 and the
level controller has been activated in P23.01.
The BIN: Controller Optimization bin controller optimization program automatically calculates the KP and TN
control parameters (P23.08 and P23.09) of the bin level controller from the conveying element constant of
the filling or emptying element in P23.06 and the dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the
bin in P23.07.
Condition The conveying element constant of the filling or emptying element entered into P23.06.
The dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the bin into P23.07
To call up Select and start the BIN: Controller Optimization calibration program
Program runtime 10 s
display when running CO: P-Component = recently calculated parameters P23.08
I-Component TN = recently calculated parameters P23.09
Parameters changed Recently calculated values are entered into P23.08 and P23.09. The parameters are au-
when results are accepted tomatically accepted without taking further action.
Potential events and Aborted !:
messages The program was finished. The parameters remain unchanged.
Feeder Constant:
The P23.06 parameter has an incorrect value (P23.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA). The program is
canceled.
Tab. 24 : The details and process of improving bin level regulation

Operation
NOTE: The calculated values of the parameters in P23.08 and P23.09 can be further adapted ma-
nually. The optimization program does not have any impact on the rest of the parameters of
the bin level controller (such as D portion, bypass and lift, etc.).
4.4.7 Linearizing the measurement

The measured value can have a non-linear dependancy on the real value depending upon the geometry of
diverting the flow of bulk solids and the inlet.
However, this correlation can be compensated for by linearizing in theLinearization block. The geometry
parameters relevant to the measurement have to be calibrated and taring [➙ 36] has to be carried out be-
fore adjusting linearization. The sensitivity should have been calibrated via P10.01.
Control measurements [➙ 47] are made at varying flow rates Sk for linearization. The rate Sk can be calcu-
lated from the Unlin. Flow Rate service value in percent of the flow rate entered in P03.02. This value might
differ from the flow rate shown as the actual flow rate depending upon the parameter setting. Linear beha-
viour is set in the parameters (Ik = Sk) as the starting point.
The ratio of progress Zk of integrating the total and the actual quantity Kk should be calculated. The new
value of the parameter Ik_new at the linearization point k results from the value Ik_old that is active during the
measurement:
Ik_new = Ik_old * Kk / Zk
Also refer to: Adjusting linearization
4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME)

Measuring units for mass flows are always subject to fault impacts that change over time. To correct them,
the quantity Mk calculated by continuous measurement over the testing period T0 is compared with the
quantity Mr actually conveyed during this period. Calculating the actual quantity with a remote static scale
makes the procedure very time-consuming. In addition, the flow of bulk solids needed for continuous pro-
duction is interrupted in the process for control.
However, this test can be carried out automatically with the control measurement unit so that continuous
measurement can be automatically corrected.
The requirement for the functioning of this process is that measuring the actual quantity is encumbered with
a substantially smaller fault than continuous measurement. The errors in determining the actual quantity
consist of error E1 (when determining an initial weight value) and error E2 (when determining the second
weight value). In the worst-case scenario, the total error ET (when determining the actual quantity) may be
calculated as:
|ET| = |E1| + |E2|
The relative error er (when determining the actual test mass Mr) can be estimated at:
er = |ET| / Mr
This error er should not be any more than 1/5 of the admissible error of continuous measurement. This
means that a minimum control quantity can be calculated if error ET is known. The random share of errors
E1 and E2 can be eliminated by carrying out the control several times while only partially correcting the fault.
The error of the continuous scale may contain constant shares, i.e. the tare error and errors dependant
upon the flow rate (the range errors). When correcting the continuous scale, the user has to decide what
type of error it is. It is necessary to distinguish the individual types of errors when operating at different flow
rates. Correct classification is less important if continuous measurement is carried out at approximately
equal flow rates. After all, it is not possible to give a general recommendation for classifying errors due to
the different bulk solids and local conditions.

Operation
DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to the technical design in a plant via P24.01 Type of Check System (select-
ing the control strategy).
You can find the parameters for adjusting the control measurement unit in the Check System block of para-
meters. There are further explanations on the process of control in the appendix.
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement
4.4.8.1.1 Single Unit Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow
of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids is short between the bin and feeder.
Fig. 6: Single Unit KME Model
Depending upon the design, the bin weight also takes in the weight of the mass flow meter and the mass
within the unit.
4.4.8.1.2 Separated Units Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow
of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids between the bin and feeder is long because additional
transport lines are interposed.

Operation
Fig. 7: Separated Units Control Type
Normally, the bin weight no longer takes in the bulk solids on the transport distance.
4.4.8.1.3 Filling System Control Type

The continually measured flow of bulk solids might be redirected through a shunt from the process into the
control bin where it is collected. The time for transporting the bulk solids between the continuous measuring
unit and bin can be long.
Fig. 8: Filling System KME Type

Operation
4.4.8.1.4 External Control Type

The control measurement is carried out through a separate unit if the bulk solids are withdrawn from one bin
by various different ways and collected by means of several continuous measuring units. We urgently rec-
ommend using the DISOCONT Master for this since the process of correction calls for a tight exchange of
data with the continuous scale.
The separate unit measures the bin weight and distributes the errors calculated over the continuous mea-
surements. The correction parameters of the continuous scales are correspondingly adjusted.
Fig. 9: External KME Type
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME)

The control measurement (KME) is a test that is carried out to calculate the error of the continuous scale
based upon the change in the weight of the bulk solids in a bin and automatically correct it wherever de-
sired.
Preconditions:
Preconditions:
▪
The P24.01 Type of Check System parameter have to be unequal to NO.
▪
The P24.08 Check Start Tare parameter has to be on OP to be able to start from the operating panel or
EasyServe.
Proceed to start tare correction from the VHM operating panel:
Call up the KME page starting from the main page (HOME).
Testing and additive correction of the zero point are called up with the Check Start Tare button and testing
and multiplicative correction of the measuring unit can be called up by Check Start Span.
After start, control goes through the phases shown in Details and flow chart control measurement (KME).
These phases are shown in the operating panel.
The following process quantities are displayed during the measurement until starting the next measurement:

Operation
The quantity shown Unit Description

Contin. Result Z kg The quantity of bulk solids ascertained by the continuous scale
Check Result F/Z - The quotient of the change of bin weight and the quantity ascertained by the
continuous scale
Relative Tare % The correction ascertained in tare with reference to rated load
Correction
Relative Span % The correction ascertained in calibration of span = the deviation in both mea-
Correction surements with reference to the measured value (even after completing the
control)
Check Belt Length m Only with belt-supported systems: the progress in the conveyor belt during
control
Check Meas. Time s Only with non-belt-supported systems: the duration of the measurement
Check Quantity kg Preselected quantity of bulk solids for the control (P24.11). The parameter
can be changed here directly with the privilege of changing parameters .
Check Circuits - Only with belt-supported systems: preselected belt progress for the control
(parameters)
BIN: Fill Weight kg or t Current bin weight
Note:
If P24.02 Auto Correction = YES, the continuous scale is automatically corrected if the results of control are
within the boundaries defined via P24.27 to P24.30.
If automatic correction was not selected or if the results of control are outside of the specified boundaries,
the Apply function can be used to correct the continuous scale. The Cancel function ends control without
changing continuous scale adjustment. The result is maintained to the next control.
If tare is corrected, the correction is carried out through P10.03 Tare Correction and the results of a zone
correction is calculated into P10.01 Range Correction. The correction is documented in the log files.
You can find more detailed information in the Types of control measurement [➙ 41] section and a flow chart
in the appendix.

Startup
5 Startup
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components

The subassemblies of a DISOCONT Tersus system come pre-assembled on delivery, e.g. attached to the
scales or installed in a control cabinet.
NOTE: If you have purchased components, please read the DISOCONT Tersus BV-H2406 system
manual where you will find information on the installation dimensions and architecture of
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
5.2 Electrical Connections

The electrical connection for the DISOCONT Tersus is shown - depending on the scope of supply - in the
model circuit diagram or in the system-specific circuit diagrams.
Further information on the electrical properties and interfaces of the subassemblies can be found in the
DISOCONT Tersus system manual BV-H2406.
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning

Control of the mechanical components, the drives and the interconnection with the system controller can
best be checked with no bulk material in simulation [➙ 31] mode.
5.4 Entering Basic parameters

The scope of a delivery of electronic and mechanical parts will always include a data sheet. It contains all of
the important rated and calibration details. The values must be entered into the corresponding parameters
(Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 29]).
Parameters often require no further adjustment, as the factory default parameter values permit scales oper-
ation in the most common applications.
Data Parameter Parameter

Number Name
The rated load cell capacities of recording torque P05.05 LC Rated Capacity
Characteristic value of load cell sensitivity P05.02 LC Characteristic Value
Nominal feeder flow rate P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate
Device constant P05.06 Device Constant
Tab. 25 : Basic parameters
It may be necessary to key in other parameters for recording bin weight.
5.5 Adjusting the flow rate regulation

The volumetric discharge output of the feed unit (conveying to the flow rate measuring unit) should be ad-
justed to the application. Within certain limits the adjustment can also be made using the parameter settings
of the DISOCONT Tersus. However, the rough adjustment is initially made by means of the mechanical
design and by the settings on the external output controller.

Startup
Fig. 10: Regulating the feeder
The adjustment depends on the type of conveyor element used and the matching output controller. We will
explain the basic procedure during commissioning using the example of a continually rotating feeder. The
procedure is identical for a feed gate continually controlled per the position setpoint with an external position
controller (mostly pneumatic). You can find the details in the relevant manuals of the external controller.
No. Operating sequence
1 Set the flow rate regulation to volumetric operation (not synchronous volumetric)
2 Select a value between 10 mA and 15 mA as a setpoint bypass P11.08 Bypass. We recommend leaving
the parameter value on factory settings.
3 Fill the bin with a sufficient quantity of bulk material. Bulk material is discharged during this calibration.
Ensure that the discharged material cannot cause malfunctions or damage in downstream processes.
4 Enter flow rate setpoint = zero [➙ 23]
Switch on feeding [➙ 22]
5 Select the controller magnitude zero point in P11.04 and P11.06 so that the feeder just conveys no more
bulk solids.
6 Key in the flow rate setpoint between 20 % and 100 % of the nominal flow rate [➙ 23]
7 Adjust the external controller so that the measured flow rate just corresponds to the setpoint. Instructions
can be found in the manual of the external controller. If the appropriate adjustment cannot be made, there
might be reason to believe that the mechanical design of the feeder is not good.
If it is not possible to adjust the external parts, they can be adjusted with the bypass constant (P11.08).
Tab. 26 : Carrying out calibration
The control parameters in the factory settings already supply sufficiently good and stable control characte-
ristics at short running times from the feeder to the measuring point. Wherever necessary, the parameters
can be manually improved in the Rate controller block.

Startup
5.6 Check with bulk solids

Each test or calibration with calibration weights can only approximate the actual operating conditions. A
highly accurate continuous measurement can only be achieved by making several measurements with bulk
material and a subsequent correction. It is corrected with Range Correction P10.01. The following figure
shows an example of the arrangement for checking belt-based continuous throughput metering.
Fig. 11: Arrangement for verification with bulk material
The following items must be observed:

1. The route from the continuous measuring point to the collecting point for the material has to be clean.
2. If there are any diverters they may not convey any material.
3. If there are any feed screws or air slides between the continuous measuring point and the collecting
point, material should be conveyed for approximately ½ hour before making a check. This will allow the
usual material build-ups to form on the conveying elements.
4. Dedusting should be set to a minimum.
5. The bins or vehicles in which the material is transported onto a (legal-for-trade) commercial scale must
be cleaned and re-weighed (tared) before each filling. The commercial scales must be sufficiently accu-
rate to measure the MW quantity.
The new value P10.01new is calculated as follows from the prior value P10.01old from the MA counter pro-
gression of continuous measurement and the MW mass ascertained on the control scale:
P10.01new = P10.01old * MW / MA
For example:
Old value of P10.01 = 1
A material quantity of MW = 4.9 t is conveyed over a period of 15 minutes. The MA counter progression
read off the device is 5.0 t.
P10.01new = 1 * 4.9/5.0 = 0.98
The calculated value should be entered into P10.01.
5.7 Calibrating bin weighing

The prerequisite for precision measurement of the quantity of bulk solids in a bin is installing the bin free of
shunt forces. The weight of the bin may only be supported on the load cells. The connections should be led
to the bin horizontally and with supple compensators.
Compression forces can cause substantial measuring errors when determining the mass of bulk solids if the
compressive forces attack vertically on the bin. In particular, this danger exists on the input and output of the
bin. The compression forces should be compensated for if it is not possible to avoid variable pressures at
these points. It can be compensated for mechanically or electronically when recording pressure.

Startup
The parameters for the bin's load cells should be keyed into P22.02, P22.03 and P22.04. The data apply
correspondingly if a second weighed bin is supposed to be adjusted.
The tare program [➙ 38] should be called up if the bin is empty. The fill level's display should vary by zero
after taking on the findings. As a check, it is advisable to get the bin vibrating for a brief period of time and
then check the measured weight value. The deviation from zero is a measure of the likely measuring error.
The bin weigher is now calibrated when using calibrated load cells.
▪
NOTES: If checking zero point stability has given rise to major errors, there are generally also
errors between the actual and displayed weight for bulk solids.
▪
The proportionality between the actual and displayed weight can be checked with the
calibration program CB: Weight Check and corrected [➙ 38].
▪
The rated value for the bin fill level should be set into P22.09 for theoretical considera-
tions, the data sheet or an optic check with a full bin.
▪
If the bin fill level is regulated by turning a prefeeder on and off, the P22.12 and P22.13
parameters should be adjusted for filling control.
▪
Regulation should be streamlined [➙ 39] after keying in the parameters if the fill level
is created with a prefeeder continually controlled in its flow performance.

Maintenance and Recalibration
6 Maintenance and Recalibration

The electronic equipment of the DISOCONT Tersus system is maintenance free. It does not contain any
wear parts under the specified ambient conditions (refer to the BV-H2406 system manual). The MTBF
(Mean Time Between Failures) is longer than 10 years. This section describes possible measures that can
be taken to guarantee accuracy of the measuring system, including for the mechanical components.
Occasion Action Remarks
Periodically, e.g. every 3 months Turn off bulk solids conveying and Most errors in the measuring unit can
tare the measuring unit. be identified in changes in tare.
A substantial change in tare indicates
changed air currents or friction in the
measuring unit. It might make sense
to check the equipment for unaccept-
able foreign particles and material
build-up of bulk solids in the instru-
ment room.
If available: check the bin weight ac- The bin should be set vibrating for a
quisition. brief period of time. The weight values
shown before and after these vibra-
tions provide a measure for shunt
forces. This can also be checked with
an empty bin. The results of taring
[➙ 47] provide a measure of the bulk
solids remaining in the bin when emp-
tying.
Change in bulk material Adjust the external output controller You may need to adjust the rated
[➙ 45] output and possibly the fill limits for a
bin.
Periodically as per the operating in- Do the maintenance work listed in the The interval may depend on the bulk
structions of the mechanical measur- manual. solids.
ing equipment and other mechanical
parts of the unit
Tab. 27 : Suggested actions

Parameters
7 Parameters
The DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to each application via parameters. No special programing knowledge is
therefore necessary.
Fig. 12: Parameter sets
Parameter set Purpose Activation Preparation and Alteration

Active parameter set Complete parameter set Always active Using EasyServe, the soft-
Regulation of measuring ware the VHM operating
and control functions console or a web server
default settings Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Cannot be changed
Non-alterable basic set- meter set using EasyServe,
ting the software the VHM oper-
ating console [➙ 30] or a
web server
Backup set Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Only using EasyServe in
Pre-setting for a group of meter set using EasyServe, expert mode
applications or a setting the software the VHM oper-
stored during commis- ating console [➙ 30] or a
sioning web server
Tab. 28 : Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus
Note: parameters not required for an application can be faded out or declared 'read only' using EasyServe
in expert mode. EasyServe compiles a list of visible parameters that form an integral part of the system do-
cumentation. They, together with this manual, make up the relevant documentation of the control system for
an application. The parameter list in the operating manual contains all of the parameters, regardless of their
actual use in an application.
In addition to the parameter set stored in the scales, we recommend that after commissioning you keep a
copy of the parameter set in a mass storage medium using EasyServe.
The parameters are arranged into blocks to for clarity. A parameter is uniquely identified by its block and
number within that block in the respective scales software version:
P01.03: block of parameters 1 → Parameter 3

Parameters
Note: Each parameter also has a unique number (ID) with which it can be addressed over the serial inter-
face. This number can be seen as a tooltip in EasyServe when passing over the parameter and can be out-
put in the parameter printout.
Gaps can appear between block numbers and parameters within the blocks.
In rare cases, the number of a parameter may change.
7.1 Abbreviations
Source Description
FB Fieldbus
OP Operating panel
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
AI Analog Inputs
AO Analog Outputs
LS Logical signal for using internally available signals
Event Event. The reaction to the occurrence of an event can be configured.
W1 Warning 1 (requires acknowledgement)
W2 Warning 2 (does not require acknowledgement)
ALARM Alarm (requires acknowledgement)
IGNORE Ignore: do not show any event message, but switch the corresponding contact outputs
LC Load Cell
I Flow rate
v Belt velocity
VCU VCU 20100 system unit of DISOCONT Tersus. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VHM DISOCONT Tersus operating panel. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VMO The machine operating console for service work. Refer to the BV-H2488 manual for details.
Tab. 29 : Abbreviations frequently used in parameters
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces

The internal software signals and signals sent externally through the interfaces are linked by means of pa-
rameters. The parameters governing the link are assigned to the logic signals and describe the origin or the
target of a signal.
The linking takes place in steps across several sections.

Parameters
Step Task
1. Select the source, such as DI, DO, ..., ...

n/a means not assigned; i.e., the function does not have any direct interaction with its surround-
ings.
2. Selection of the control unit, such as VCUx or VMOx, ...
It only shows the control units preselected in the Hardware Modules block of parameters.
As many 3 VCU and 2 VMO can be assigned to one scale. Address switches are used to diffe-
rentiate between the units. Details on setting the address can be found in the system manual BV-
H2406.
3. Select the channel number on the control unit, e.g. DI 1 ...
4. Select for the active signal the external signal level LOW or HIGH.
Tab. 30 : Step-by-step specification of signal links
The source parameter defines whether a more precise signal path setting is also necessary. The linking
parameters only offer technically meaningful interfaces.
Source Unit Channel Level Purpose
DI VCU1-VCU3 DI1-DI7 High, Low Binary input signals

VMO1-VMO2
FB
DO VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Binary output signals
VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5
AI VCU1-VCU3 AI1-AI2 Analog interface
VMO1-VMO2 AI1-AI3
AO VCU1-VCU3 AO1-AO4 Analog interface
VMO1-VMO2 AO1-AO3
LC VCU1-VCU3 LC1-LC2 Load cell interface
LS VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Internal by-pass of an output for local
VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5 operation
n/a The internal signal is not assigned to any interface. Input signals adopt automatically a
state that does not interfere with the
program flow.
FB Fieldbus, no additional details required Controlled by signals or fieldbus
OP VHM operating panel, no additional details required Controlled by operating panel entries
v Speed, no additional details required Link with an internal signal
Tab. 31 : Signal sources and their descriptions
Source Type of internal signal

Unit Interface assembly for external signal exchange
Channel Designation of the channel in the unit
Level Identifier of the value of the external signal if the internal logical signal accepts the True value. You
can switch here between active high and active low signal levels, i.e. the value of the external sig-
nal can be inverted.
Tab. 32 : Meaning of the columns

Parameters
Setting Binary input NAMUR input Binary output
Low Voltage = 0 V across the Current at the input > 3 mA High resistance, relay contact open
input terminals (sensor not covered)
High Voltage > 18 VDC across Current at the input < 1 mA Low resistance, relay contact closed
the input terminals (sensor covered)
Tab. 33 : The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal
Name Unit Source Channel Level

DI: External Event 1 DI VCU1 DI1 Low
Tab. 34 : Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel
The DI: External Event 1 signal is connected at input DI1 of VCU1. If the input is open (low), this is inter-
preted as logically True (or 1).
7.3 Configuring
Configuring Event Messages
The system monitors a range of both of its own operation and the peripherals. The reaction to a recognized
deviation, that is to say an event, is set by parameter. The parameters are used to assign to each event a
class that will determine this reaction.
Event class Description Impact on Acknowledgement Color on

Feeding required the VHM
Alarm ALARM Stopping feed operation, Yes Red

The scale will be turned off,
Cannot be switched on
Warning 1 W1 Feeder will continue to run Yes Orange
Warning 2 W2 Feeder will continue to run No Yellow
Only display as long as
the event is active
Ignore IG Feeder will continue to run - -
Tab. 35 : Event classes
NOTE: An external binary output channel is set that may have been assigned to the event regard-
less of the event class.
A recently pending alarm- or warning 1-class event will be shown on the operating panel blinking and in
color. The blinking stops when acknowledged. Acknowledged event messages are cleared from the display
for currently pending events when the event is no longer pending. Each event is stored with a time-stamp in
the internal memory [➙ 28] for later analysis.

Parameters
7.4 Parameter List
7.4.1 Parameter Overview

VIF20170-001 3002
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Customer Sys ID
P01.01 [➙ 75] Analog Channel A10 NO 5746
P01.02 [➙ 75] Analog Channel A11 NO 5747
P01.03 [➙ 75] VCU20100-Unit 2 NO 4211
P01.04 [➙ 75] VCU2: Analog Channel A10 NO 5771
P01.06 [➙ 75] Event: Communication A 4216

VCU20100-Unit 2
P01.07 [➙ 75] VCU20100-Unit 3 NO 4212

VCU20100-Unit 3
P01.11 [➙ 75] VHM RS485 Address 1 4221
P01.12 [➙ 75] VMO20100-Unit 1 NO 4222

VMO20100-Unit 1
P01.14 [➙ 75] VMO20100-Unit 2 NO 5834

VMO20100-Unit 2
02 - Dialog Behaviour
P02.01 [➙ 78] Language * DEUTSCH 4224
P02.02 [➙ 78] Units * Metric 4225
P02.03 [➙ 78] Scale Name * DISOCONT Tersus VIF 6238
P02.04 [➙ 78] Access Rights Limitation HMI * NO 4801
P02.05 [➙ 78] Remote IP Address HMI 1 * 192.168.240.21 4798
P02.06 [➙ 78] Event: Communication HMI 1 * IG 4218

Parameters
P02.11 [➙ 78] Event: Communication VHM seri- IG 4804

al *
P02.12 [➙ 78] Password * 10000 4292
P02.13 [➙ 78] 2. Password * 14389 4321
P02.14 [➙ 78] Reset Counter 1 * active 4286
P02.15 [➙ 78] Reset Counter 2 * active 4287
P02.16 [➙ 78] Batch control * active 4283
P02.17 [➙ 78] Switch Grav./Vol. command * active 4595
P02.18 [➙ 78] Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode * active 4282
P02.19 [➙ 78] Prefeeder start/stop * active 4813
P02.20 [➙ 78] Data Log ON/OFF * Password 4309
P02.21 [➙ 78] Exit Scale * active 4600
03 - Feeder Definition
P03.01 [➙ 83] Control NO 4590
P03.02 [➙ 83] Nominal Flow Rate 200000 kg/h 4226
P03.03 [➙ 83] Flow Rate Units ----.- t/h 4229
P03.04 [➙ 83] Counter 1 Unit -----.- t 4230
P03.05 [➙ 83] Counter 2 Unit ------- t 4232
P03.06 [➙ 83] Counter 3 Unit ------- t 4233
P03.07 [➙ 83] Pulse Length Total 0.05 s 4231
P03.08 [➙ 83] DO: Pulse Counter n/a 4239
P03.09 [➙ 83] Totalizer Increment 0 kg 4254
04 - Control Sources
P04.01 [➙ 86] Feeder Start * FB 4241
P04.02 [➙ 86] Feedrate Setpoint * FB 4242
P04.03 [➙ 86] Setpoint Range * 20 mA 4243
P04.04 [➙ 86] Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 4244
P04.05 [➙ 86] Source Run Enable * n/a 4245
P04.06 [➙ 86] Event: Run Disabled * W2 4246

Parameters
P04.07 [➙ 86] Source Relative Setpoint * n/a 6233
P04.08 [➙ 86] Relativer Setpoint Range * 20 mA 6240
P04.09 [➙ 86] Relative Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 6241
05 - Rated Data
P05.01 [➙ 88] LC: Load Measurement LC 4266
P05.02 [➙ 88] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4257
P05.03 [➙ 88] Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset 4 mA 5837
P05.04 [➙ 88] Load Cell 1 analog Input Range 20 mA 5838
P05.05 [➙ 88] LC Rated Capacity 100 kg 4258
P05.06 [➙ 88] Device Constant 0.04 kgh/t 4265
06 - Feeder control
P06.01 [➙ 89] Volumetric Start-Up 0s 4272
P06.02 [➙ 89] Afterflow Totalizer 3s 4274
07 - Feeder Monitoring
P07.01 [➙ 89] Event: Stand-By W2 4289
P07.02 [➙ 89] Stand-By Limit Value 2 % Io 4290
P07.03 [➙ 89] Event: Error LC Input A 4293
P07.04 [➙ 89] Event: LC Input < MIN A 4294
P07.05 [➙ 89] Event: LC Input > MAX A 4295
P07.06 [➙ 89] Event: Setpoint Limited W1 4296
P07.07 [➙ 89] Event: Power Failure A 4297
P07.08 [➙ 89] Time Deviation 20 s 4298
P07.09 [➙ 89] Threshold Deviation 5% 4299
P07.10 [➙ 89] Factor Deviation 1 4320
P07.11 [➙ 89] Deviation abs. max. 100 % 6255
P07.12 [➙ 89] Event: Deviation A 4300
P07.13 [➙ 89] Event: Controller Limited W2 4301
P07.14 [➙ 89] Event: Memory A 4302

Parameters
P07.15 [➙ 89] Event: Analog Input < Offset A 5418
P07.16 [➙ 89] Source Emergency Setpoint n/a 4930
P07.17 [➙ 89] Emergency Setpoint 6000 kg/h 4931
08 - Filters
P08.01 [➙ 94] LC Filter 0.25 s 4334
P08.02 [➙ 94] Filter: Actual Flow Rate 3s 4328
P08.03 [➙ 94] Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog 3s 4329
P08.04 [➙ 94] Filter: Load 3s 4335
P08.05 [➙ 94] Filter: Deviation 3s 4333
09 - Limit Values
P09.01 [➙ 95] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN 5 % Io 4337
P09.02 [➙ 95] Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN W1 4338
P09.03 [➙ 95] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX 120 % Io 4339
P09.04 [➙ 95] Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX W1 4340
10 - Calibration Data
P10.01 [➙ 96] Range Correction 1 4352
P10.02 [➙ 96] Basic Tare 0 kg 4355
P10.03 [➙ 96] Tare Correction 0 kg 4356
P10.04 [➙ 96] Zeroing Limit 5%Q 4677
P10.05 [➙ 96] Calibration Time 30 s 4358
P10.06 [➙ 96] Tare Correction Check 0 kg 4935
P10.07 [➙ 96] Calibration Weight 1 kg 4354
P10.08 [➙ 96] Material Correction 1 4360
11 - Rate controller
P11.01 [➙ 97] Controller Type Continuous 4701
P11.02 [➙ 97] P-Component KP 0.02 mA/% 4369
P11.03 [➙ 97] I-Component TN 3s 4370
P11.04 [➙ 97] Lower Limit 0 mA 4371

Parameters
P11.05 [➙ 97] Upper Limit 20 mA 4372
P11.06 [➙ 97] Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4373
P11.07 [➙ 97] Position at STOP 0 4374
P11.08 [➙ 97] Bypass 10 mA 4375
P11.09 [➙ 97] Store NO 4376
P11.10 [➙ 97] Setpoint Filter 1st Ord 2s 4378
P11.11 [➙ 97] Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord 0s 4379
P11.12 [➙ 97] KP Adaptation 1 4644
P11.13 [➙ 97] Setpoint Threshold 0 % Io 4805
P11.14 [➙ 97] S: P-Component 0.033 s/% 4687
P11.15 [➙ 97] S: I-Component 3s 4688
P11.16 [➙ 97] S: Threshold Response 0.1 % 4689
P11.17 [➙ 97] Compensation Element 0 1/s 4690
12 - Analog Outputs
P12.01 [➙ 102] AO: Setpoint n/a 4385
P12.02 [➙ 102] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4386
P12.03 [➙ 102] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4387
P12.04 [➙ 102] AO: Actual Flow Rate n/a 4388
P12.05 [➙ 102] Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 4389
P12.06 [➙ 102] Flow Rate Range 20 mA 4390
P12.07 [➙ 102] AO: Load n/a 4401
P12.08 [➙ 102] Load Offset 4 mA 4402
P12.09 [➙ 102] Load Range 20 mA 4403
P12.10 [➙ 102] AO: Deviation n/a 4397
P12.11 [➙ 102] Deviation Offset 4 mA 4398
P12.12 [➙ 102] Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
P12.13 [➙ 102] AO: Motor Speed Control AO 4400
13 - Digital Inputs
P13.01 [➙ 105] Event: External Event 1 * A 4417
P13.02 [➙ 105] DI: External Event 1 * DI 4418

Parameters
P13.03 [➙ 105] Event: External Event 2 * A 4430
P13.04 [➙ 105] DI: External Event 2 * DI 4431
P13.05 [➙ 105] Event: External Event 3 * IG 4730
P13.06 [➙ 105] DI: External Event 3 * n/a 4731
P13.07 [➙ 105] Event: External Event 4 * IG 4732
P13.08 [➙ 105] DI: External Event 4 * n/a 4733
P13.09 [➙ 105] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 * A 4409
P13.10 [➙ 105] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 * A 4410
P13.11 [➙ 105] Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 * IG 4411
P13.15 [➙ 105] DI: Acknowledge Events * n/a 4419
P13.16 [➙ 105] DI: Local Mode * n/a 4420
P13.17 [➙ 105] DI: Volumetric Mode * n/a 4421
P13.18 [➙ 105] DI: Volumetric synchron * n/a 4941
P13.19 [➙ 105] DI: Reset Totalizer 1 * n/a 5414
P13.20 [➙ 105] DI: Reset Totalizer 2 * n/a 5415
P13.21 [➙ 105] Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 * IG 5895
P13.22 [➙ 105] Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 * IG 5896
14 - Digital Outputs
P14.01 [➙ 110] DO: Feeder Started DO 4434
P14.02 [➙ 110] DO: Start Prefeeder DO 4435
P14.03 [➙ 110] DO: ALARM DO 4436
P14.04 [➙ 110] DO: Deviation n/a 4437
P14.05 [➙ 110] DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN n/a 4438
P14.06 [➙ 110] DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX n/a 4439
P14.07 [➙ 110] DO: Volumetric Mode n/a 4444

Parameters
P14.08 [➙ 110] DO: Local Mode n/a 4445
P14.09 [➙ 110] DO: WARNING n/a 4759
P14.10 [➙ 110] DO: Keyboard Mode n/a 4462
15 - Batch Mode
P15.01 [➙ 112] Batch Mode NO 4448
P15.02 [➙ 112] Batch Setpoint Source FB 4449
P15.03 [➙ 112] Adaptation Mode Ramp 5426
P15.04 [➙ 112] Correction Amount 0 kg 4451
P15.05 [➙ 112] Adaptation Factor 0.5 4452
P15.06 [➙ 112] Batch Automatic Record NO 4453
P15.07 [➙ 112] DI: Batch Terminate n/a 4454
P15.08 [➙ 112] DO: Batch Running n/a 4455
P15.09 [➙ 112] DO: Dribble Feed n/a 4456
P15.10 [➙ 112] DO: Full Feed n/a 4457
P15.12 [➙ 112] Analog Setpoint Relat. 1000 kg 4936
P15.13 [➙ 112] Batch Setpoint Range 20 mA 4937
P15.14 [➙ 112] Batch Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4938
P15.15 [➙ 112] Adaptation Time 3s 4450
P15.16 [➙ 112] Adaption Start Value 300 % Io 5382
P15.17 [➙ 112] Time Dribble Feed 2 0% 5428
P15.18 [➙ 112] Value Dribble Feed 2 0% 5427
P15.19 [➙ 112] DO: Dribble Feed 2 n/a 5429
P15.20 [➙ 112] Batch Tolerance 100000 kg 4458
P15.21 [➙ 112] Event: Out of Tolerance W2 4459
P15.24 [➙ 112] Batch Setpoint Limit 1000000 kg 4781
P15.25 [➙ 112] Event: Batch setpoint Limit W1 4782
P15.26 [➙ 112] Batch behaviour after power down Cancel 4601
16 - Maintenance interval
P16.01 [➙ 116] Maintenance Electric 3000 h 4465

Parameters
P16.02 [➙ 116] Event: Maint. Electric IG 4466
P16.03 [➙ 116] Maintenance Feeder Run 3000 h 4467
P16.04 [➙ 116] Event: Maint.Feeder Run IG 4468
17 - Communication EasyServe
P17.01 [➙ 117] Own Address 1 4520
P17.02 [➙ 117] Baud Rate 38400 4521
P17.03 [➙ 117] Format Data 8-N-1 6189
18 - Communication Fieldbus
P18.01 [➙ 118] Protocol Type NO 4528
P18.02 [➙ 118] Timeout Host 10 s 4529
P18.03 [➙ 118] Event: Cyclic Communication A 4530
P18.04 [➙ 118] Event: Acyclic Communication W2 5680
P18.05 [➙ 118] Check in Keyboard Mode YES 6234
P18.06 [➙ 118] Compatibility DISOCONT Master NO 6287
P18.07 [➙ 118] Word Sequence I:std/L:std 6246
P18.08 [➙ 118] Byte Sequence High - Low 6245
P18.09 [➙ 118] Configuration FIXED_8_16 4661
P18.10 [➙ 118] Address 1 4531
P18.11 [➙ 118] Resolution 4096 4533
P18.12 [➙ 118] Baud rate 19200 4535
P18.13 [➙ 118] Data Format 8-O-1 4656
P18.14 [➙ 118] Physics RS232 6186
P18.15 [➙ 118] Address 16 4539
P18.16 [➙ 118] FLOAT-Format IEEE 4540
P18.17 [➙ 118] Address 63 4541
P18.18 [➙ 118] Baud rate 125K 4542
P18.19 [➙ 118] Parameter NO 4658
P18.20 [➙ 118] Preset Count 2 4734

Parameters
P18.21 [➙ 118] READ_ID Count 6 4659
P18.22 [➙ 118] Access Rights Limitation FB NO 4786
P18.23 [➙ 118] Remote IP Address FB 192.168.240.250 4787
19 - Fixed mode configuration

P19.01 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 1 320 6247
P19.02 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 2 352 6248
P19.03 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 3 384 6249
P19.04 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 4 592 6250
P19.05 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 5 594 6251
P19.06 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 6 610 6252
P19.07 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 7 0 6253
P19.08 [➙ 123] ID Preset Value 8 0 6254
P19.09 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 1 752 6256
P19.10 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 2 784 6257
P19.11 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 3 1552 6258
P19.12 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 4 1872 6259
P19.13 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 5 1874 6260
P19.14 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 6 1882 6261
P19.15 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 7 1890 6262
P19.16 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 8 1894 6263
P19.17 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 9 816 6264
P19.18 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 10 1876 6265
P19.19 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 11 1906 6266
P19.20 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 12 1960 6267
P19.21 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 13 1896 6268

Parameters
P19.22 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 14 1898 6269
P19.23 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 15 1902 6270
P19.24 [➙ 123] ID Read Value 16 1904 6271
20 - Ethernet
P20.01 [➙ 127] IP Address 192.168.240.1 6235
P20.02 [➙ 127] Net Mask 255.255.255.0 6236
P20.03 [➙ 127] Gateway 0.0.0.0 6237
21 - PLC Outputs
P21.01 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 1 n/a 4662
P21.02 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 2 n/a 4663
P21.03 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 3 n/a 4664
P21.04 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 4 n/a 4665
P21.05 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 5 n/a 4666
P21.06 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 6 n/a 4667
P21.07 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 7 n/a 4668
P21.08 [➙ 127] DO: PLC 8 n/a 4669
P21.09 [➙ 127] AO: PLC 1 n/a 4670
P21.10 [➙ 127] AO: PLC 2 n/a 4671
P21.23 [➙ 127] Position at STOP 0 5907
22 - Bin Weigher
P22.01 [➙ 129] Bin Weigher Active NO 4704
P22.02 [➙ 129] LC: Load Measurement n/a 4705
P22.03 [➙ 129] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4706
P22.04 [➙ 129] LC Rated Capacity 1000 kg 4707
P22.05 [➙ 129] LC Filter 0.25 s 4708
P22.06 [➙ 129] Bipolar Measurement NO 4712
P22.07 [➙ 129] Event: Error LC Input (Bin) W1 4709
P22.08 [➙ 129] Event: LC Input > MAX W1 4710
P22.09 [➙ 129] Nominal Bin Load 100 % LC 4711

Parameters
P22.10 [➙ 129] Display Format ---.--- t 4672
P22.11 [➙ 129] Display Filter 3s 4713
P22.12 [➙ 129] Control Level MIN 60 % 4714
P22.13 [➙ 129] Control Level MAX 70 % 4715
P22.14 [➙ 129] DO: Bin Filling n/a 4716
P22.15 [➙ 129] Bin Level MIN 5% 4717
P22.16 [➙ 129] Event: Bin Level MIN W1 4718
P22.17 [➙ 129] DO: Bin Level MIN n/a 4719
P22.18 [➙ 129] Bin Level MAX 120 % 4720
P22.19 [➙ 129] Event: Bin Level MAX W1 4721
P22.20 [➙ 129] DO: Bin Level MAX n/a 4722
P22.21 [➙ 129] AO: Bin Load n/a 4723
P22.22 [➙ 129] AO: Offset 4 mA 4724
P22.23 [➙ 129] AO: Range 20 mA 4725
P22.24 [➙ 129] Range Correction 1 4726
P22.25 [➙ 129] Tare (Bin) 0 kg 4727
P22.26 [➙ 129] Calibration Weight 10 kg 4728
P22.27 [➙ 129] Controller in OFF-Mode NO 4755
P22.28 [➙ 129] DI: Bin Load Sensor n/a 5401
P22.29 [➙ 129] Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor W1 5402
P22.30 [➙ 129] Bin Level analog Input Offset 4 mA 4825
P22.31 [➙ 129] Bin Level analog Input Range 20 mA 4826
23 - Bin Level Controller

P23.01 [➙ 137] Bin Controller ON NO 4735
P23.02 [➙ 137] Filling Type YES 4736
P23.03 [➙ 137] AO: Controller Magnitude Bin n/a 4738

Level
P23.04 [➙ 137] DO: Feeder ON n/a 4758
P23.05 [➙ 137] Setpoint Bin Level 0 kg 4757
P23.06 [➙ 137] Feeder Constant 0 (kg/h)/mA 4741
P23.07 [➙ 137] Dead Time TT 3s 4742
P23.08 [➙ 137] P-Component KP 0 mA/kg 4739

Parameters
P23.09 [➙ 137] I-Component TN 0s 4740
P23.10 [➙ 137] D Portion TV 0s 4747
P23.11 [➙ 137] D Filter TD 0s 4748
P23.12 [➙ 137] Bypass 10 mA 4743
P23.13 [➙ 137] Bypass D Portion 0s 4749
P23.15 [➙ 137] Lower Limit 0 mA 4745
P23.16 [➙ 137] Upper Limit 20 mA 4746
P23.17 [➙ 137] Dead Band Deviation 0 kg 4750
P23.18 [➙ 137] Dead Band Factor 0 4751
P23.19 [➙ 137] Setpoint Filter 0.5 s 4752
P23.20 [➙ 137] Flow Rate Filter 0.5 s 4753
P23.21 [➙ 137] DI: Init. Controller n/a 4754
P23.22 [➙ 137] Bin Setpoint source PARAMETER 5476
P23.24 [➙ 137] Stepper no Stepper 5549
P23.25 [➙ 137] S: P-Component 0.033 s/% 5550
P23.26 [➙ 137] S: I-Component 3s 5551
P23.27 [➙ 137] S: D-Component 0s 5552
P23.28 [➙ 137] S: Threshold Resp. 0.1 % 5553
P23.29 [➙ 137] S: Compensation Element 0 1/s 5554
P23.30 [➙ 137] S: DO Open Flow Gate (B) n/a 5555
P23.31 [➙ 137] S: DO Close Flow Gate (B) n/a 5556
P23.32 [➙ 137] AI: Position Flow Gate (B) n/a 5557
P23.33 [➙ 137] AI: Offset (B) 4 mA 5558
P23.34 [➙ 137] AI: Range (B) 20 mA 5559
P23.35 [➙ 137] AO: Position Flow Gate (B) n/a 5560
P23.36 [➙ 137] AO: Offset (B) 4 mA 5561
P23.37 [➙ 137] AO: Range (B) 20 mA 5562
P23.38 [➙ 137] Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) W2 5563
P23.39 [➙ 137] Position MIN Flow Gate (B) n/a 5564
P23.40 [➙ 137] Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) W2 5565
P23.41 [➙ 137] Position MAX Flow Gate(B) n/a 5566

Parameters
24 - Check System
P24.01 [➙ 145] Type of Check System NO 4861
P24.02 [➙ 145] Auto Correction NO 4903
P24.03 [➙ 145] Cyclic Auto Start NO 4862
P24.04 [➙ 145] Cycle Time 0.5 h 4863
P24.05 [➙ 145] Release Check System n/a 4864
P24.06 [➙ 145] Event: No Check Release W2 4884
P24.07 [➙ 145] Check Start Span OP 4865
P24.08 [➙ 145] Check Start Tare OP 4866
P24.09 [➙ 145] Accept Correction OP 4867
P24.10 [➙ 145] Finish Check Measurement OP 4868
P24.11 [➙ 145] Check Quantity 0 kg 4871
P24.12 [➙ 145] Storage Quantity 500 kg 4872
P24.13 [➙ 145] Minimum Fill Weight 0 kg 4875
P24.14 [➙ 145] Event: Minimum Fill Weight W1 4876
P24.15 [➙ 145] Maximum Fill Weight 1000 kg 4877
P24.16 [➙ 145] Event: Maximum Fill Weight W1 4878
P24.17 [➙ 145] Damping Time 3s 4879
P24.18 [➙ 145] DO: Control Started n/a 4881
P24.19 [➙ 145] Feeder Stopped n/a 4882
P24.20 [➙ 145] Event: Feeder Not Stopped W1 4883
P24.21 [➙ 145] Event: Prepare Check Measure- W2 4885

ment
P24.22 [➙ 145] DO: Check Measurement Active n/a 4887
P24.23 [➙ 145] Event: Expect Acceptance W2 4888
P24.24 [➙ 145] DO:Expect Acceptance n/a 4889
P24.25 [➙ 145] Absolute Range 10 % 4890
P24.26 [➙ 145] Relative Range 3% 4891
P24.27 [➙ 145] Event: Absolute Tare Correction W1 4892

Error
P24.28 [➙ 145] Event: Relative Tare Correction W1 4893
Error
P24.29 [➙ 145] Event: Absolute Span Correction W1 4894
Error

Parameters
P24.30 [➙ 145] Event: Relative Span Correction W1 4895

Error
P24.31 [➙ 145] Correction Evaluation 1 4896
P24.32 [➙ 145] Correction Speed 0s 4897
P24.33 [➙ 145] AO: Check Measurement Result n/a 4898
P24.34 [➙ 145] DO: Check Gate n/a 4899
P24.35 [➙ 145] Check Gate Feedback n/a 4900
P24.36 [➙ 145] Check Gate Time 0s 4901
P24.37 [➙ 145] Event: Check Gate Error W1 4902
P24.38 [➙ 145] Limit Max. Bin Error 0% 4946
P24.39 [➙ 145] Event: Bin Error W1 4947
P24.40 [➙ 145] DO: Correction Error n/a 4904
25 - Moisture
P25.01 [➙ 156] Moisture Active NO 5386
P25.02 [➙ 156] Moisture Select n/a 5399
P25.03 [➙ 156] AI: Moisture Measurement n/a 5387
P25.04 [➙ 156] Nominal Moisture 20 % 5388
P25.05 [➙ 156] Moisture Offset 4 mA 5389
P25.06 [➙ 156] Moisture Range 20 mA 5390
P25.07 [➙ 156] DO: Moisture active n/a 5400
P25.08 [➙ 156] Moisture MAX 10 % 5391
P25.09 [➙ 156] DO: Moisture MAX n/a 5392
P25.10 [➙ 156] Event: Moisture MAX W1 5393
P25.11 [➙ 156] AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394
P25.12 [➙ 156] AO: Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 5395
P25.13 [➙ 156] AO: Flow Rate Range 20 mA 5396
P25.14 [➙ 156] Pulse Counter corrected NO 5397
26 - Additional device
P26.01 [➙ 159] Auto Zero Active NO 4675
P26.02 [➙ 159] Auto Zero Limit 2%Q 5478
P26.03 [➙ 159] Event: Tare Correction W1 4678

Parameters
P26.04 [➙ 159] Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
P26.05 [➙ 159] Zero Drop-Out Limit 1 % Io 4680
P26.06 [➙ 159] DO: Agitator ON n/a 4654
P26.07 [➙ 159] START Agitator 30 % Io 4572
27 - Dead Time
P27.01 [➙ 161] Dead Time Active NO 5403
P27.02 [➙ 161] Dead Time 0s 5404
P27.03 [➙ 161] Setpoint Select n/a 5405
P27.04 [➙ 161] Setpoint Clock ON n/a 5406
P27.05 [➙ 161] ON/OFF Select n/a 5407
P27.06 [➙ 161] ON/OFF Clock ON n/a 5408
P27.07 [➙ 161] Time Elements Preassign n/a 5409
P27.08 [➙ 161] Initialise Time Elements n/a 5410
P27.09 [➙ 161] DO: Dead Time Active n/a 5411
P27.10 [➙ 161] DO: Setpoint Active n/a 5412
P27.11 [➙ 161] DO: ON/OFF Active n/a 5413
28 - Interlocking
P28.01 [➙ 163] DI: Event Mechanics 1 n/a 4760
P28.06 [➙ 163] DI: Event Electricity 1 n/a 4765
P28.09 [➙ 163] DO: Event Mechanics n/a 4768
P28.10 [➙ 163] Event: Mechanics W1 4769
P28.11 [➙ 163] DO: Event Electricity n/a 4770
P28.12 [➙ 163] Event: Electricity W1 4771
P28.13 [➙ 163] DO: Event Mechatronics 1 n/a 4772

Parameters
P28.14 [➙ 163] DO: Event Mechatronics 2 n/a 4773
P28.15 [➙ 163] Event: Mechatronics W1 4774
P28.16 [➙ 163] DO: Ready n/a 4775
P28.17 [➙ 163] Event: Not Ready W1 4776
P28.18 [➙ 163] DO: Ready for Start n/a 4777
P28.19 [➙ 163] Event: Not Ready for Start W1 4778
29 - FCB analog outputs

P29.01 [➙ 166] FCB_AO 01 n/a 20481
P29.02 [➙ 166] Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
P29.03 [➙ 166] Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
P29.04 [➙ 166] Reference FCB_AO 1 1000 6274
P29.05 [➙ 166] FCB_AO 02 n/a 20482
P29.06 [➙ 166] Offset FCB_AO 2 4 mA 6275
P29.07 [➙ 166] Range FCB_AO 2 20 mA 6276
P29.09 [➙ 166] FCB_AO 03 n/a 20483
P29.10 [➙ 166] Offset FCB_AO 3 4 mA 6278
P29.11 [➙ 166] Range FCB_AO 3 20 mA 6279
P29.13 [➙ 166] FCB_AO 04 n/a 20484
P29.14 [➙ 166] Offset FCB_AO 4 4 mA 6281
P29.15 [➙ 166] Range FCB_AO 4 20 mA 6282
P29.17 [➙ 166] FCB_AO 05 n/a 20485
P29.18 [➙ 166] Offset FCB_AO 5 4 mA 6284
P29.19 [➙ 166] Range FCB_AO 5 20 mA 6285

Parameters
P29.21 [➙ 166] FCB Variant Empty 5902
P29.22 [➙ 166] Event: FCB-Error A 5903
30 - FCB digital outputs

P30.01 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 01 n/a 20529
P30.02 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 02 n/a 20530
P30.03 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 03 n/a 20531
P30.04 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 04 n/a 20532
P30.05 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 05 n/a 20533
P30.06 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 06 n/a 20534
P30.07 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 07 n/a 20535
P30.08 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
P30.09 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
P30.10 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 10 n/a 20538
P30.11 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 11 n/a 20539
P30.12 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 12 n/a 20540
P30.13 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 13 n/a 20541
P30.14 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 14 n/a 20542
P30.15 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 15 n/a 20543
P30.16 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 16 n/a 20544
P30.17 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 17 n/a 20545
P30.18 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 18 n/a 20546
P30.19 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 19 n/a 20547
P30.20 [➙ 170] FCB_DO 20 n/a 20548
31 - Data Logging
P31.01 [➙ 173] Hourly Total Time 0 min 5743
P31.02 [➙ 173] Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
P31.03 [➙ 173] Logger cycle time 1 min 6288
P31.04 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 1 752 6289
P31.05 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 2 755 6290

Parameters
P31.06 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 3 1872 6291
P31.07 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 4 1874 6292
P31.08 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 5 1876 6293
P31.09 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 6 1894 6294
P31.10 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 7 1890 6295
P31.11 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 8 1898 6296
P31.12 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 9 1888 6297
P31.13 [➙ 173] Data Log Value 10 0 6298
32 - Configuration HMI Values

P32.01 [➙ 175] HMI Value 01 1872 6299
P32.02 [➙ 175] HMI Value 02 1894 6300
P32.03 [➙ 175] HMI Value 03 1900 6301
P32.04 [➙ 175] HMI Value 04 1946 6302
P32.05 [➙ 175] HMI Value 05 2012 6303
P32.06 [➙ 175] HMI Value 06 2358 6304
P32.07 [➙ 175] HMI Value 07 2044 6305
P32.08 [➙ 175] HMI Value 08 1904 6306
P32.09 [➙ 175] HMI Value 09 1874 6307
P32.10 [➙ 175] HMI Value 10 1876 6308
33 - Linearization
P33.01 [➙ 177] Linearization ON NO 4577
P33.02 [➙ 177] Linearization S1 25 % Io 4681
P33.03 [➙ 177] Linearization I1 25 % Io 4579

Parameters
P33.10 [➙ 177] Event: Linearization Error W2 4586
34 - Flow Gate
P34.01 [➙ 178] S: DO Open Flow Gate n/a 4702
P34.02 [➙ 178] S: DO Close Flow Gate n/a 4703
P34.03 [➙ 178] AI: Position Flow Gate n/a 4691
P34.04 [➙ 178] AI: Offset 4 mA 4692
P34.05 [➙ 178] AI: Range 20 mA 4693
P34.06 [➙ 178] AO: Position Flow Gate n/a 4694
P34.07 [➙ 178] AO: Offset 4 mA 4695
P34.08 [➙ 178] AO: Range 20 mA 4696
P34.09 [➙ 178] Event: MIN Flow Gate W2 4697
P34.10 [➙ 178] Position MIN Flow Gate n/a 4698
P34.11 [➙ 178] Event: MAX Flow Gate W2 4699
P34.12 [➙ 178] Position MAX Flow Gate n/a 4700
35 - Local Mode (Speed)

P35.01 [➙ 180] Motor Select (Block 1) VMO1 Motor1 5841
P35.02 [➙ 180] ON in Remote (Block 1) n/a 5842
P35.03 [➙ 180] Controller Magnitude (Block 1) n/a 5843

(Block 1)
P35.05 [➙ 180] JOG enable (Block 1) NO 5844
P35.06 [➙ 180] Release local Start (Block 1) n/a 5845
P35.07 [➙ 180] DI: External Error 1 (Block 1) n/a 5846
P35.10 [➙ 180] DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) n/a 5849
P35.11 [➙ 180] Motor Select (Block 2) VMO1 Motor2 5850

Parameters

(Block 2)
P35.21 [➙ 180] Motor Select (Block 3) not active 5859

(Block 3)

(Block 4)

(Block 5)

Parameters
36 - Local Mode (Gate)

P36.01 [➙ 190] Motor Select VMO1 Motor5 5886
P36.02 [➙ 190] OPEN in Remote n/a 5887
P36.03 [➙ 190] DI: Limit Switch OPEN n/a 5888
P36.04 [➙ 190] CLOSE in Remote n/a 5889
P36.05 [➙ 190] DI: Limit Switch CLOSE n/a 5890
P36.06 [➙ 190] Release local Start n/a 5891
P36.07 [➙ 190] DI: External Error 1 n/a 5892
7.4.2 Parameter Details
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules

A DISOCONT Tersus system can comprise up to a maximum of 3 VCU control units, several VHM (OP)
operating panels and up to 2 motor controllers (VMO). A PC running the EasyServe program can be con-
nected for service purposes.
With the exception of EasyServe and the operating elements (VHM, OP) all of the units involved must be
signed on with the parameters in group P01.xx. Units that are not signed on cannot be used and their inputs
and outputs will not be made available by either EasyServe or the operating elements.
Furthermore, up to 2 analog input or output components (VAI or VAO) can be installed.
Caution:
For reasons of safety, it is imperative that the relevant communication error messages should register an
alarm (A) when originating from units that are actively involved in the control loop.

Parameters
P01.01 Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel set at position A10 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
AIx: analog input VAI installed
AOx: analog output installed
x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.02 Analog Channel A11 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel set at position A11 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
P01.03 VCU20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 2 and VIO
software.
P01.04 VCU2: Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A10 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A11 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.

Parameters
P01.06 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 2
Event Group: SY Number: 02
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.
P01.07 VCU20100-Unit 3 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 3 and VIO
software.

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A10 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A11 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed
P01.10 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 3
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.

Parameters
P01.11 VHM RS485 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 16
The parameter defines the address under which the VHM operating element can reach the
scale via RS485 coupling.
P01.12 VMO20100-Unit 1 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The first unit VMO 201xx is connected to the local bus. The address 11 must be set by
parameter for this unit.
P01.13 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 1
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
P01.14 VMO20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Second VMO 201xx unit is connected to the local bus. The address 12 must be set by pa-
rameter for this unit.
P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 2
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour

The parameters of this group define system behavior towards the operator and set access authorization.

Parameters
P02.01 Language Default: DEUTSCH

Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Device dialog language. User-defined texts can be used if OTHER is selected. Texts can
be written and loaded using EasyServe.
P02.02 Units Default: Metric

Alternative: Metric
English
Switches display and parameter entry units from metric (SI units) to non-metric systems
(English). All values entered will be converted automatically.
P02.03 Scale Name Default: DISOCONT Tersus VIF
Letters and characters can be used. The name appears in the upper row of the operating
console and when searching through networks for controllers.
Remark: The characters ";" and "=" are not accepted. During the saving procedure these
characters will automatically be deleted.
P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI Default: NO

Alternative: NO
REMOTE IP
The rights for controlling the scales from the operating console VHM or the user interface of
a browser (HMI) connected via Ethernet can be restricted. The restricted rights apply to the
start and stop commands and the setpoint entry.
Alternatives:
NO: control commands are permitted from all operating locations
REMOTE IP: control commands are possible only from the operating console with the IP
address listed in the following parameters.
Also refer to:

P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1
...
P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3

Parameters
P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1 Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the first operating panel from which control commands should be given.
The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or
P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485.
Also refer to:

P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI
P02.06 Event: Communication HMI 1 Default: IG

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.
Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s.
To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
Address of the second operating panel from which control commands are to be given.
Also refer to:


Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.

Parameters
The address of the third operating element that control commands are supposed to be giv-
en from.
Also refer to:


Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
P02.11 Event: Communication VHM serial Default: IG

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operat-
ing panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
P02.12 Password Default: 10000

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 1 for access protection of certain functions on the operator panel as per the fol-
lowing parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd
password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password keyed in is
shown encoded for protection. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 7353

Parameters
P02.13 2. Password Default: 14389

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 2 for access protection for certain functions on the operator panel as per the
following parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the
2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password entered is
shown encoded on the screen. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 2889
P02.14 Reset Counter 1 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.15 Reset Counter 2 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.16 Batch control Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.17 Switch Grav./Vol. command Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password

Parameters
P02.18 Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.19 Prefeeder start/stop Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.20 Data Log ON/OFF Default: Password

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Enables functions Start Data Logging , Stop Data Logging and Clear Data Log File.
Parameters see block Data Logging.
P02.21 Exit Scale Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for the function at the operator panel.
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition

The parameters of this group configure basic functionality.
P03.01 Control Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Switch between feed rate regulation and simple measuring.
YES: metering, feed-rate regulating system

NO: measuring system

Parameters
P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate Default: 200000 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
The nominal flow rate is a characteristic value of the scale that acts as a reference value for
threshold values and service displays.
P03.03 Flow Rate Units Default: ----.- t/h

Alternative: ------ kg/h
----.- kg/h
---.-- kg/h
--.--- kg/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- kg/min
----.- g/min
-----.- g/h
----.-- g/h
Display format for setpoint and actual feed rate values.
P03.04 Counter 1 Unit Default: -----.- t

Alternative: ------- kg
-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Display format for counter 1.

Parameters
P03.05 Counter 2 Unit Default: ------- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Display format for counter 2
P03.06 Counter 3 Unit Default: ------- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Display format for counter 3.
P03.07 Pulse Length Total Default: 0.05 s

Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
Duration of an external totalizing counter output impulse.
The weighting of a pulse (WI) is defined by P03.09 Totalizer Increment.
If the impulse duration is shorter than 10 ms the impulse output is disabled. All impulses not
issued yet are cleared.
The output frequency f is approximately Nominal Flow Rate:

f [Hz] = P03.02 / 3600 * P03.09
≤
The output frequency must be 10 Hz if an external counter is connected.

Parameters
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
DO: Selecting the physical output for triggering an external pulse counter for the measured
quantity. Bear in mind the limitations on speed and life cycle when selecting a relay output
and set the weight equivalent for a pulse in P03.09 Totalizer Increment. The duration of the
impulse is set by P03.07 Pulse Length Total.
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000 kg
Weight equivalent of an impulse at the output for the external counter as per P03.08 DO:
Pulse Counter.
The DO: Pulse Counter is blocked when setting the valence '0'.
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources

The parameters of this group assign internal signals to the physical outputs.
P04.01 Feeder Start Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
DI
Specifies the device that will turn on the scales.
The digital input is flank-controlled, i.e., the ON signal must be removed and then reapplied
if the scale becomes inoperative because of something like an alarm.
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
AI
Determines which signal input gives the flow rate setpoint.
P04.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Min: 0 mA Max: 1000 mA
Input current for the analog setpoint of 100 % of the Nominal Flow Rate.
The range and offset parameters take effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set
to AI.

Parameters
P04.04 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Min: -200 mA Max: 200 mA
Input current offset for an analog setpoint of 0 % of Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter takes effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.
P04.05 Source Run Enable Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Determines the signal input that gives the scales release signal. This input is generally
used for interlocking with downstream transport equipment.
The setting 'n/a' means that no release is required.
P04.06 Event: Run Disabled Default: W2

Event Group: IL Number: 01
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched
on.
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
OP
AI
A preset feed rate setpoint (compare P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint) can be percentaged by the
VHM operating console or by an analog input. This function is used if the system is to feed
a percentage of an additional material to the original component.
For example:
P04.02 = AI
P04.07 = OP
The effective setpoint is the percentage component, entered into the operating console, of
the absolute setpoint set through the analog input.
If the setpoint is given as per P04.02 by the operating console (P04.02 = OP) or the scales
are in keyboard mode P04.07 will have no effect, i.e. the setpoint entered at the operating
console works as entered.

Parameters
P04.08 Relativer Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for entry 100%.
P04.09 Relative Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0%.
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data

The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P05.01 LC: Load Measurement Default: LC VCU1.LC1

Alternative: LC
n/a
AI
FB
The definition of the input channel for measuring the force that constitutes a measure of the
flow rate.
P05.02 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
Characteristic value (transmission factor) of the (main) load cell.
P05.03 Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Only relevant if P05.01 LC: Load Measurement = AI.
The input current for an internal value of the load of 0 %.
Also refer to:

P05.01 LC: Load Measurement
P05.04 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range

Parameters
P05.04 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

Only relevant if P05.01 LC: Load Measurement = AI.
The current for the value set in P05.05 LC Rated Capacity.
Also refer to:

P05.05 LC Rated Capacity Default: 100 kg

Min: 0.1 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the load cell rated loads for recording the weight.
P05.06 Device Constant Default: 0.04 kgh/t

Min: 0.001 kgh/t Max: 1 kgh/t
This parameter describes the transfer response of the meter from the mass flow rate to the
measuring force in kg. You can find this value in the instrument's datasheet.
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control

The parameters of this group describe the control functions of the basic functionality.
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 3600 s
Length of time it takes to begin volumetric operation once the scales have been switched
on. If selected, feeding will switch to gravimetric operation once the startup time has past.
This function improves the startup with an empty feeder.

The optional speed controller is also active during startup.
P06.02 Afterflow Totalizer Default: 3 s

For this time after shutting off, the scale continues to record the resulting quantity conveyed
through the afterflow of bulk solids when the drives run out.
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm
(A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).

Parameters
P07.01 Event: Stand-By Default: W2

Event Group: SC Number: 02
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller
than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched
off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 2 % Io

Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
If the controller magnitude is below the threshold value, the feed drive is switched off to
protect the motor from overheating.
Also refer to: P07.01 Event: Stand-By
P07.03 Event: Error LC Input Default: A

Event Group: CA Number: 01
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The
load cell may be faulty.
Measures:
- check the cabling and the load cell
- check the load cell
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switched on
even after the error has been rectified.
P07.04 Event: LC Input < MIN Default: A

Event Group: LO Number: 01
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.
Possible causes:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Parameters
P07.05 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: A

Event Group: HI Number: 01
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of
the load cells.
Measuring range end:

125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited Default: W1

Cause of the event:

Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate in volume-
tric operation.
P07.07 Event: Power Failure Default: A

Event Group: WE Number: 01
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event must
first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales will restart.

Parameters
P07.08 Time Deviation Default: 20 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Duration for which a control deviation above the threshold in P07.09 Threshold Deviation
will be tolerated. The event 'control deviation' is identified once the time has been ex-
ceeded.
Simultaneously P07.08 Time Deviation functions as a time constant for the filter that con-
tains the value of the control deviation. A 'control deviation' event is also identified if the
filtered result exceeds the threshold value P07.11 Deviation abs. max..
Also refer to:

P07.09 Threshold Deviation
P07.10 Factor Deviation
P07.11 Deviation abs. max.
P07.12 Event: Deviation
P07.09 Threshold Deviation Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum permissible control deviation.
Reference: P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate.
Also refer to: P07.08 Time Deviation, P07.12 Event: Deviation
P07.10 Factor Deviation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
An event message as per P07.12 Event: Deviation will be identified if the absolute value of
the control deviation for the duration P07.08 Time Deviation is greater than the threshold
P07.09 Threshold Deviation.
With a setpoint of 100%, the effective threshold is always determined by the parameter
P07.09 Threshold Deviation. For lower setpoints the threshold can be reduced with para-
meter P07.10 Factor Deviation.
Examples:
P07.10 = 0 : Effective threshold = P07.09 × Setpoint / P03.02
P07.10 = 1 : Effective threshold = P07.09
P07.11 Deviation abs. max. Default: 100 %

Min: 0.1 % Max: 1000 %
The amount of the control deviation will be filtered (filter time constant: P07.08 Time Devia-
tion). If the filter output exceeds the limit set here a 'control deviation' event will be identified
(P07.12 Event: Deviation). The filter is reset when the scales are switched off.

Parameters
P07.12 Event: Deviation Default: A

Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint
over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
- material has been incorrectly handled:
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
- the controller has at times come against its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regu-
lator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical value that
minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable operation.
Also refer to: P07.11 Deviation abs. max., P07.10 Factor Deviation, P07.09 Threshold Dev-
iation, P07.08 Time Deviation
P07.13 Event: Controller Limited Default: W2

Event Group: CO Number: 01
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response thre-
shold. After a time message HI05 (P07.12) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y).
At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.
P07.14 Event: Memory Default: A

The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during
that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.

Parameters
P07.15 Event: Analog Input < Offset Default: A

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input sig-
nal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
P07.16 Source Emergency Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
If the emergency setpoint is activated, setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint
(P07.17 Emergency Setpoint) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P07.17 Emergency Setpoint Default: 6000 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
If the emergency setpoint is activated (input P07.16 Source Emergency Setpoint), setpoints
greater than the emergency setpoint (P07.17) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the
time set if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
P08.01 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value
should be left at the factory setting.
Note: filtering the load cell signal also effects the regulating action.
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display and for outputs of the actual flow rate at the operating
element, EasyServe and fieldbus. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.

Parameters
P08.03 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the 'actual flow rate' analog output. The filter can have an impact on
the control characteristics with an externally closed control circuit through the analog value.
P08.04 Filter: Load Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display of the load on the load cell. The filter only has an impact
on the display, not on the further processing of the signal for determining the flow rate and
quantity measured.
P08.05 Filter: Deviation Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the control deviation.
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values

The parameters of this group define the limits for process values and specify the event classes of the asso-
ciated events.
Events that can only occur with regular feed operation are only monitored 10 s after beginning feed opera-
tion.
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: 5 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Lower threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: W1

The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too low

Parameters
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: 120 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Upper threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.04 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: W1

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too large
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data

The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values
that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No
readjustment is necessary.
P10.01 Range Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
The parameter affects the load measurement F proportionally.
Q(corrected) = Q(measured) * P10.01
P10.02 Basic Tare Default: 0 kg

Min: -1000000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The result of the TW: Tare calibration program in accordance with the dead weight without
the flow of bulk solids.
P10.03 Tare Correction Default: 0 kg

Min: -10000 kg Max: 10000 kg
The results of the >0< Zero Set calibration program or automatic zero setting.

Parameters
P10.04 Zeroing Limit Default: 5 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 100 % Q
Maximum permissible value of the sum of all zeroing operations of the manual or automatic
zeroing system.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load (Service value)
P10.05 Calibration Time Default: 30 s

Duration of the adjustment program.
P10.06 Tare Correction Check Default: 0 kg

Min: -1000000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The parameter contains the results of the tare correction from the automatic check mea-
surement.
P10.07 Calibration Weight Default: 1 kg

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 22000 kg
The calibration weight serves to control the weighing system. so that the calibration pro-
gram CW: Span Calibration is run without bulk solids flowing.
The test weight as it acts on the load cell is keyed in.
P10.08 Material Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
The correction factor for the measured flow rate ascertained with a check measurement
using bulk solids. This parameter can be set manually or by automatic check measurement
(KME) with DISOCONT Tersus.
Also refer to: the appendix with measuring the flow rate
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller

The parameters of this group define the behavior of the feed rate controller.
Also refer to the controller block diagrams in the appendices.

Parameters
P11.01 Controller Type Default: Continuous

Alternative: Continuous
Stepping
Choose a controller model
Continuous: The controller generally calculates a continuous controller magnitude as an

analogous value. If position-controlled prefeeders are used, the position has to be con-
trolled externally according to the specifications from the continuous value.
Stepping: The controller controls the position of a position-controlled prefeeder with the
digital Open and Close outputs.
Also refer to: the appendix for details on the controller models
P11.02 P-Component KP Default: 0.02 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
Proportional component of the feed rate regulator.
Special case: KP = 0 results in an I-regulator
Reference value: P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate
Also refer to:

A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendices
P11.03 I-Component TN Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Controller readjusting time.
TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants KI, i.e. a larger value means a slower
controller.
KI = 1/TN
TN in %/(mA/s)
TN = 0 results in a proportional controller.
Also refer to:

A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendix

Parameters
P11.04 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Lower limit for the regulator actuating variable.
If transfer is made with currents from 4 ... 20 mA, the parameter should be set at least to
4 mA. P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset must be set to a value equal to or greater than
P11.04 Lower Limit.
Also refer to: P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset
P11.05 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper limit for the regulator actuating variable.
With inputs lower than 20 mA the limit depends on the size of the threshold value.
Also refer to:

A description of the effect of the upper limit can be found in the appendices
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Offset of the actuating variable by a constant value. The offset takes effect before the limi-
tation of the actuating variable.
Generally the same values are chosen for P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset as for
P11.04 Lower Limit.
Optimization:
- fill the feeder hopper with bulk material
- calculate the actuating variable Y1, the value at which the discharge unit begins to work
- calculate the actuating variable Y2, the value at which reduction of the feed is suspended.
For feeders that are operated with feed rate setpoints of 0:
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y2
All other feeders:
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y1
Note: P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset must be equal to or greater than P11.04 Lower
Limit.
P11.07 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
If the scales are switched off the actuating variable can be set to 0 or to the offset value
P11.04 Lower Limit.

Parameters
P11.08 Bypass Default: 10 mA

The constant for the setpoint bypass (also refer to the controller figure in the appendix). The
bypass instantaneously passes on a portion of the flow rate setpoint to the controller magni-
tude to the feed drive. This parameter contains the current at which the prefeeder just sup-
plies the nominal flow rate (P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate).
Setting: operate the feeder volumetrically and set the bypass so that actual flow rate = set-
point. This value should be approximately 10 ... 15 mA. Otherwise the external flow rate
controller should be adjusted.
P11.09 Store Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES-A
Saving the control magnitude before turning off the scale. The next start will begin with this
value.
NO: do not save

YES: save
YES-A: only save if the scale has not broken down due to an alarm
P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord Default: 2 s

The time constant for a 1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the by-
pass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller

through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.10 and P11.11
delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a
delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.10 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix

Parameters
P11.11 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord Default: 0 s

The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the by-
pass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller

through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.10 and P11.11
delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a
delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.11 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.12 KP Adaptation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 2
Setpoint-dependent review of the proportional component of the regulator.
This parameter is used to optimize the regulation action for small setpoints.
For example:
KP control= 1 : KP is independent of the setpoint
KP control = 0: KP decreases in proportion to the setpoint
KP control = 2: KP increases in proportion to the setpoint
P11.13 Setpoint Threshold Default: 0 % Io

This parameter can be used separately to set the control for start-up and normal operation.
Below the target value threshold in P11.13, the control deviation is multiplied with the factor
adjusted in P11.12 KP Adaptation before entering into the controller. The factor is set to 1
above the threshold.
Examples:
Target value threshold = 0: The proportional component is evaluated independant of the
setpoint as described with parameter P11.12.
Target value threshold > 0%: The controller input is evaluated with the parameter P11.12
below this threshold. The controller input remains unaffected by P11.12 above this thre-
shold.

Parameters
P11.14 S: P-Component Default: 0.033 s/%

Min: 0 s/% Max: 1000 s/%
Only relevant if P11.01 = "Stepping".
The proportion of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Also refer to: P11.15 S: I-Component
P11.15 S: I-Component Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The integral component of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Also refer to: P11.14 S: P-Component
P11.16 S: Threshold Response Default: 0.1 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The minimum waiting period between two adjustment steps. This parameter can be used to
prevent continuous vibration of the prefeeder around the operating point.
P11.17 Compensation Element Default: 0 1/s

Min: 0 1/s Max: 60000 1/s
The compensation element is an additional integrator in the control deviation branch that
only
functions in gravimetric operation. It is used to
• overcoming the trigger threshold.
• reducing contouring errors with monotonically changing malfunctions.
• avoid the remaining control deviations with a non-symmetrical
control element and cyclical malfunctions.
The input and output of the compensation element are limited to 5 %. The parameter gives
the integration constant.
Special case: P11.17=0: The integrator is cleared.
Configuration for the compensation element to correct contouring errors. There might be
contouring errors if the volumetric flow rate depends on the level of a bin and the bin is
emptied.
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs

The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels. On the VCU 20104
controller only one analog channel is available and it is set to feedrate feedback by default.

Parameters
P12.01 AO: Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the flow rate set value.
Also refer to: P12.02 Setpoint Offset, P12.03 Setpoint Range
P12.02 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the flow rate set value of 0 %.
Reference: P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of a flow rate set value of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the actual flow rate.
Also refer to: P12.05 Flow Rate Offset, P12.06 Flow Rate Range
P12.05 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate

Parameters
P12.06 Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.07 AO: Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the output channel for the load measured.
Also refer to: P12.08 Load Offset, P12.09 Load Range
P12.08 Load Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for a platform load of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Load
P12.09 Load Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for a platform load of 100 % of the nominal load (service value).
Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Load
P12.10 AO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the control deviation.
Also refer to: P12.11 Deviation Offset, P12.12 Deviation Range
P12.11 Deviation Offset Default: 4 mA

The value of the control deviation 'zero' lies between the offset and 20 mA.
Also refer to: P12.10 AO: Deviation

Parameters
P12.12 Deviation Range Default: 20 mA

The output current is calculated according to the following formula:
Current = 10 mA + (P12.11)/2 + (P12.12 - P12.11) × control deviation / 100 %
P12.13 AO: Motor Speed Control Default: AO VCU1.AO1

Alternative: AO
n/a
Analog output channel for the actuating variable Y of the feed rate regulator.
Also refer to:

- the parameters in the 'regulator' block
- the regulator diagram in the appendices
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input
channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard
wired on the controller and cannot be changed.
P13.01 Event: External Event 1 Default: A

External interference signal at fault input 1.
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive
P13.02 DI: External Event 1 Default: DI VCU1.DI1 Low

Alternative: DI
n/a
Input 1 for an external interference signal.
The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking).
Also refer to: P13.01 Event: External Event 1

Parameters
P13.03 Event: External Event 2 Default: A

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
P13.04 DI: External Event 2 Default: DI VCU1.DI2 Low

Alternative: DI
n/a
P13.05 Event: External Event 3 Default: IG

P13.06 DI: External Event 3 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P13.07 Event: External Event 4 Default: IG


Parameters
P13.08 DI: External Event 4 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P13.09 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 Default: A

The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level.
Possible cause:
- cable to the sensor is broken
- the sensor is faulty
- there is a short circuit in the cable connection
- an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.10 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 Default: A

Possible cause:
P13.11 Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 Default: IG

Possible cause:

Parameters

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:
P13.15 DI: Acknowledge Events Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for acknowledging event messages.
Caution: the level is static and may not be on permanently (otherwise continuous acknowl-
edgement).

Parameters
P13.16 DI: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Feedback from the local operating console VLG that has been switched to 'local'.
The DISOCONT Tersus is now a passive display device only. It is switched to 'volumetric'
automatically to suppress event messages. The DISOCONT Tersus switches itself off when
it is switched back.
P13.17 DI: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for switching the scales to volumetric operation, not synchronized with previous
operation.
Also refer to: P13.18 DI: Volumetric synchron
P13.18 DI: Volumetric synchron Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Switches to volumetric operation while the actuating variable continues continuously. The
actuating variable is calculated as an average of the actuating variable obtained during
regular operation. Alterations to the feed rate setpoint automatically adjust the actuating
variable.
Also refer to: P13.17 DI: Volumetric Mode
P13.19 DI: Reset Totalizer 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for canceling totalizing counter 1. The positive flank is the actuator.
P13.20 DI: Reset Totalizer 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for clearing totalizing counter 2. The positive flank takes effect.

Parameters
P13.21 Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 Default: IG

Possible cause:
P13.22 Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 Default: IG

Possible cause:
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output
channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P14.01 DO: Feeder Started Default: DO VCU1.DO3 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
Digital output signal used to display the ON or OFF scales states.
P14.02 DO: Start Prefeeder Default: DO VCU1.DO1 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
The digital output for turning the prefeeder on or off.
P14.03 DO: ALARM Default: DO VCU1.DO4 Low

Alternative: DO
n/a
The output becomes active if any alarm is triggered (common alarm). The scales have
failed.

Parameters
P14.04 DO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the monitoring activates the control deviation
(P07.12 Event: Deviation).
This contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.05 DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed rate (P09.01
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN).
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.06 DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the maximum feed rate (P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX) is exceeded.
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.07 DO: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to a volumetric mode.
P14.08 DO: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to local mode.
P14.09 DO: WARNING Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if any warning is pending.

Parameters
P14.10 DO: Keyboard Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when keyboard mode is preselected.
(The DISOCONT Tersus is operated using the operating console VHM or EasyServe).
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode

The parameters of this group define and optimize behavior in batch mode. Batching mode is used to ensure
that the feeder turns off independantly after conveying a preset quantity.
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.01 Batch Mode Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Sets whether batch mode can be run or not.
In addition, 'batching' 'selection' has to be selected with the operating menu.
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
AI
Establish the source that will determine the batch.
P15.03 Adaptation Mode Default: Ramp

Alternative: Ramp
Steps
Defines behavior once the batch setpoint is reached:
Ramp: the actuating variable is run to zero using a ramp function.

Steps: the device is turned off by switching first to dribble feed or, if required, in two dribble-
feed stages of different capacities

Parameters
P15.04 Correction Amount Default: 0 kg

Min: -100000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The start of the adaptation time is shifted by this quantity. An adaptation time = 0 corres-
ponds to a pre-threshold.
The correction quantity should be set to 0 for initial startup. The value of Correction Amount
is adapted after each batch if P15.05 Adaptation Factor is not equal to zero so that the
defect of the next batch is minimized.
P15.05 Adaptation Factor Default: 0.5

Min: 0 Max: 1
The application point of the switch-off function is adapted automatically so that the system
is better adapted to the actual conditions for the next batch.
Adaptation Factor = 0 : no adaptation

Adaptation Factor = 1 : full adaptation
Interim values result in filtered adjustment; this should be used in particular for systems with
poor reproducibility.
The result of the event is stored in P15.04 Correction Amount.
P15.04 NEW = P15.04 OLD - Batch Residual Amount * P15.05
P15.06 Batch Automatic Record Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES: automatic print after each completed batch.
NO: Printout of the batch can only be made via menu.
The printout can be made only after a batch has ended automatically or manually. The
printout is stored to a file that can be read using the Web-Server.
P15.07 DI: Batch Terminate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input signal for stopping a current batch.
P15.08 DO: Batch Running Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if a batch is run.
The signal is active at the start of the batch and deactivated again when the batch has been
completed. It remains active if batch operation is continuous.

Parameters
P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active in the dribble feed phase.
P15.10 DO: Full Feed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active in the full feed phase.
P15.12 Analog Setpoint Relat. Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Effective only when P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source = AI
The batch setpoint resulting for an input flow corresponding to the parameter P15.13 Batch
Setpoint Range.
P15.13 Batch Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Input current for a batch setpoint that corresponds to P15.12 Analog Setpoint Relat..
P15.14 Batch Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Input current for a batch setpoint of 0. Negative values can bridge the input area.
For example:
P15.12 = 1000 kg
P15.13 = 20 mA
P15.14 = -20 mA
0 ... 20 mA then correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg
P15.15 Adaptation Time Default: 3 s

Establishes the duration of the entire dribble feed phase.
P15.16 Adaption Start Value Default: 300 % Io

Feed rate setpoint that starts the ramp at the end of the batch.

Parameters
P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2 Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Proportion of the material conveyance with dribble feed feed rate 2 as a percentage.
Reference value: P15.15 Adaptation Time
Also refer to: P15.18 Value Dribble Feed 2, P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2
P15.18 Value Dribble Feed 2 Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Feed rate setpoint during dribble feed phase 2. This value takes effect only in case P15.17
Time Dribble Feed 2 > 0.
Reference value: P15.16 Adaption Start Value
Also refer to: P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2, P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2
P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel with which dribble feed 2 is activated. This value takes effect
only in case P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2 > 0.
Also refer to: P15.18 Value Dribble Feed 2, P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2
P15.20 Batch Tolerance Default: 100000 kg

If the batch lies outside of the tolerance range, the maximum alteration of
the correction quantity at adaptation is the entered tolerance value. Also, an event is identi-
fied.
Also refer to: P15.21 Event: Out of Tolerance
P15.21 Event: Out of Tolerance Default: W2

Event Group: MF Number: 06
The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces

Parameters
P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit Default: 1000000 kg

Min: 1 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Upper threshold for batch setpoint entry. The threshold is used to prevent incorrect entries
and thus overflows.
Also refer to: P15.25 Event: Batch setpoint Limit
P15.25 Event: Batch setpoint Limit Default: W1

Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper
limit in P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit
P15.26 Batch behaviour after power down Default: Cancel

Alternative: Continue
Cancel
Defines behavior after a power down:
Cancel: the batch begun before the power down is aborted. A new batch is begun with the
current setpoint.
Continue: the batch begun before the power down is completed.
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval

The parameters of this group define maintenance intervals and the internal accuracy analysis function.
P16.01 Maintenance Electric Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the power supply. This parameter defines the interval between maintenance work.
Also refer to: P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric

Parameters
P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric Default: IG

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01
Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.
P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the scales (scales ON). This parameter defines the interval between maintenance
work.
Also refer to: P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run
P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run Default: IG

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Main-
tenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe

The parameters of this group define the parameters for serial communication with EasyServe via RS232 or
RS485. These parameters have no function if EasyServe is connected via Ethernet.
P17.01 Own Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485.
All devices connected to the communicatio bus must have disjunct addresses.
Also refer to: P17.02 Baud Rate, P17.03 Format Data

Parameters
P17.02 Baud Rate Default: 38400

Alternative: 38400
Data transfer speed. This parameter is used for information only. The speed cannot be
changed.
P17.03 Format Data Default: 8-N-1

Alternative: 8-N-1
Formats the serial data. The value is used for information only and cannot be altered.
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus

The parameters of this group define the communication procedure to be used to a higher-level plant control
system and configure the data link.
Details on the fieldbus interface can be found in the following manuals:

DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468

Parameters
P18.01 Protocol Type Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
Ethernet/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card.
DISOCONT Tersus: Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual
BV-H2406. Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2448) contains further information on the
data structures.
INTECONT Tersus: Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2474) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: Modbus-TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
Modbus-RTU: RS232, RS422 or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface card VSS 28020 must
be installed.
PROFIBUS DP: Fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed.
DeviceNet: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed.
Modbus-TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using Ethernet and the main VCU
RJ45 plug.
Ethernet/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU.
The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host comput-
er.
P18.02 Timeout Host Default: 10 s

Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface
A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in
P18.02 is greater than zero.
P18.03 Event: Cyclic Communication Default: A

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been inter-
rupted for longer than the timeout-period in P18.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.

Parameters
P18.04 Event: Acyclic Communication Default: W2

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P18.05 Check in Keyboard Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
To be able to use keyboard mode as emergency operation if coupling fails (without having
to log off the fieldbus coupling), this parameter can be used
to deactivate fieldbus communication monitoring in keyboard mode.
This allows the scales to be operated even if the fieldbus link fails.
P18.06 Compatibility DISOCONT Master Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Compatibility setting for the predecessor electronics systems DISOCONT or INTECONT
PLUS.
NO: Not completely compatible

YES: compatible, but with restricted data link compatibility for new functions
P18.07 Word Sequence Default: I:std/L:std

Alternative: I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word.
I → denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values)

L → denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values)
std → will not swap the word order
swp → will swap the word order
P18.08 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.

Parameters
P18.09 Configuration Default: FIXED_8_16

Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a de-
tailed description in the manuals for data communication:
The contents of the data have to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is
compatible to one another!
P18.10 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus.
Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P18.11 Resolution Default: 4096

Min: 1 Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value trans-
ferred.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P18.12 Baud rate Default: 19200

Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.

Parameters
P18.13 Data Format Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Example: 8-O-1 means:

1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
P18.14 Physics Default: RS232

Alternative: RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus RTU)

Min: 0 Max: 126
Address of the slave at the PROFIBUS
P18.16 FLOAT-Format Default: IEEE

Alternative: IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parame-
ters.

Min: 0 Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P18.18 Baud rate Default: 125K

Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.

Parameters
P18.19 Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P18.20 Preset Count Default: 2

Min: 2 Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.
P18.21 READ_ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales → master) that are
queried in a telegram.
P18.22 Access Rights Limitation FB Default: NO

Alternative: NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P18.23
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P18.23 Remote IP Address FB Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP.
Also refer to: P18.22 Access Rights Limitation FB
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration

Configuration of the data in fieldbus communication 'FIXED' mode that were exchanged with the host com-
puter via serial interface.
Also refer to: P18.09 Configuration
For the available data and their Ids see the separated communication manual:

Parameters

P19.01 ID Preset Value 1 Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It can-
not be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the 'data com-
munication' manual:
Corresponds to P19.01 ID Preset Value 1

Parameters
P19.09 ID Read Value 1 Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
As P19.09 ID Read Value 1

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet

The parameters in this group control the Ethernet ports. It is necessary to provide inputs when EasyServe, a
VHM operating panel or a host computer is supposed to be connected via Ethernet.
You can find information on the selection of addresses in the BV-H2406 manual.
P20.01 IP Address Default: 192.168.240.1
IP address of the weighing electronics. If the control system is integrated into an Ethernet
network, the address must be chosen in agreement with the network administrator. In iso-
lated networks we recommend the factory setting 192.168.240.x. "x" allows for selection of
the system on the bus.
P20.02 Net Mask Default: 255.255.255.0
The net mask setting is based on the local network type.

In general the following setting is used: 255.255.255.0
See also: P20.02 Net Mask, system manual BV-H2406
P20.03 Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0
Generally no input is required. Typical value: 0.0.0.0
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs

Applicable only when physical DISOCONT Tersus outputs are controlled by the control system.
The DISOCONT Tersus allows physical output signals to be controlled directly by the control system com-
puter via fieldbus. The parameters of this group assign physical channels to the fieldbus commands.
Please also refer to: status of fieldbus protocol commands in manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communica-
tion' (BV-H2448).
P21.01 DO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO
Corresponds to P21.01 DO: PLC 1

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P21.09 AO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P21.10 AO: PLC 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P21.09 AO: PLC 1
P21.23 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher

In addition to the weighfeeder, the system supports weighing and bin level control of an additional hopper.
This hopper is often a control hopper for the continuous weighfeeder.
P22.01 Bin Weigher Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Simulation
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales.
It has the following functions:
1. displaying the bin weight
2. registering and monitoring threshold values
3. regulating the (min/max) level
4. the check scale for the check system
It can also be filled via menu.
The continuous fill level can also be regulated via block Bin Level Controller.
P22.01 = Simulation:
Bin regulation and min/max regulation are simulated.
The continuous scale draws off material and filling is done with 4 × P03.02.

Parameters
P22.02 LC: Load Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LC
AI
FB
Definition of the measuring channel
If FB or AI are selected the external value will be converted to a value with mV/V units that
corresponds to a measurement from a load cell. The following signal processing calculates
weight in kg from the signal in mV/V and is identical for all input types.
Also refer to:

P22.03 LC Characteristic Value
If AI is selected, refer also to:

P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
P22.03 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells have to have the same
nominal value.
Also refer to: P22.04 LC Rated Capacity
P22.04 LC Rated Capacity Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the bin's load cell rated capacities. All load cells must have the same rated data.
Special case of a partially-weighed bin:

If a bin is only supported x % by load cells at WZ nominal 1 nominal load sum and is other-
wise supported on non-weighed supports (fixed bearings), the load cell rated capacity to be
entered is given by
P22.04 = WZnenn1 × 100 % / x %
If the percentage component x % on the load cell is not known a priori, the nominal value is
determined by externally weighing one bin level.
Also refer to: P22.03 LC Characteristic Value
P22.05 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter.
The load cell filter affects all measuring load related measuring values.

Parameters
P22.06 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Switches the measuring range for the load cell amplifier.
NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only

YES: the load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces
As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze
the signal in the direction of compression only. The YES setting is needed in rare special
cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight.
Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.
P22.07 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) Default: W1

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The
load cell may be faulty.
Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched
on even after the error has been rectified.
P22.08 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: W1

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P22.09 Nominal Bin Load Default: 100 % LC

Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is
given as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P22.04 LC Rated Capacity).

Parameters
P22.10 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P22.11 Display Filter Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value.
The filter applies to the display and to the analog or serial printout but not for threshold
values or control contacts.
P22.12 Control Level MIN Default: 60 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using MIN and MAX levels (output P22.14 DO: Bin Filling).
Switched on if the bin level underruns the MIN level and switched off again when the MAX
level is reached.
Reference value: P22.09 Nominal Bin Load
See also: P22.13 Control Level MAX
P22.13 Control Level MAX Default: 70 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P22.14 DO:
Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again
when it reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P22.12 Control Level MIN

Parameters
P22.14 DO: Bin Filling Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output to start the filling procedure.
The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered.
Also refer to: P22.12 Control Level MIN, P22.13 Control Level MAX
P22.15 Bin Level MIN Default: 5 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P22.16 Event: Bin Level MIN, P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN
P22.16 Event: Bin Level MIN Default: W1

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
Also refer to: P22.15 Bin Level MIN
P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'.
The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates
independent of the event class of the corresponding event.
P22.18 Bin Level MAX Default: 120 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
Max threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P22.19 Event: Bin Level MAX, P22.20 DO: Bin Level MAX

Parameters
P22.19 Event: Bin Level MAX Default: W1

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
Also refer to: P22.18 Bin Level MAX
P22.20 DO: Bin Level MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output in case the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold.
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P22.21 AO: Bin Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level.
Also refer to: P22.22 AO: Offset, P22.23 AO: Range
P22.22 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a bin weight of 0 %.
See also:
P22.21 AO: Bin Load
P22.23 AO: Range
P22.09 Nominal Bin Load
P22.23 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for a fill weight of 100 %.
See also: P22.21 AO: Bin Load, P22.22 AO: Offset

Parameters
P22.24 Range Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is set automatically by the calibra-
tion program CB: Weight Check'.
The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P22.24.
P22.25 Tare (Bin) Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The tare is calculated automatically by the calibration program TW: Tare' and set into this
parameter.
P22.26 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Used to enter the test weights used for the calibration program CB: Weight Check.
P22.27 Controller in OFF-Mode Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter defines whether the filling weight control (P22.12 Control Level MIN, P22.13
Control Level MAX, P22.14 DO: Bin Filling) and bin regulation (block: bin level controller)
are always active or only when the scale is switched on.
P22.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for a bin load sensor. The probe has the function of keeping the bin from over-
flowing. If the sensor is activated, filling is discontinued for 60 seconds or is aborted.
- output as per P22.14 DO: Bin Filling to OFF
- output as per P23.04 DO: Feeder ON to OFF
- controller magnitude (P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level) to 0 and controller in
base position
Filling is aborted regardless of the filling source (regulator, controller, manual)
and the event class (P22.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor).

Parameters
P22.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor Default: W1

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shut-
ting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P22.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjust-
ment of the calculation of the feed rate.
P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Raising the analog input for the bin fill level of the additional bin
The input current corresponding to a signal of 0 mV/V.

Effective only when P22.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs'
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The sensitivity adjustment of the analog input for weighing the additional bin
Converting the analog value into the voltage signal corresponding to a load cell:
The measured value [mV/V] = (input flow – P22.30) / (P22.31 – P22.30) * P22.03
where:
P22.30 = Bin Level analog Input Offset
P22.31 = Bin Level analog Input Range
P22.03 = LC Characteristic Value
Effective only when P22.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs'
P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset

Parameters
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller

This continuous controller keeps the fill level in the bin at the setpoint level.
Precondition: weight measurement of the separate bin has been activated (P22.01 Bin Weigher Active =
YES).
Digital control of the separate bin filling can be found in the Bin Weigher block.
Details on the controller and the controller block diagram can be found in the appendix.
P23.01 Bin Controller ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates the continuous controller for the fill level of the additional bin.
Also refer to: P22.01 Bin Weigher Active
P23.02 Filling Type Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the standard direction.
YES: The controlled organ fills the bin.

NO: The controlled organ empties the bin.
P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Output signal for the fill level controller actuating variable.
P23.04 DO: Feeder ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output channel for switching on the continuous feed element (control element).
The output is set to off, the controller magnitude is set to 0 and the controller is put into the
base position with every scale alarm. The automatic check system (KME) does the regulat-
ing during its measuring phase.
P23.05 Setpoint Bin Level Default: 0 kg

Setpoint for the hopper in normal operation.

Parameters
P23.06 Feeder Constant Default: 0 (kg/h)/mA

Min: 0 (kg/h)/mA Max: 1000000 (kg/h)/mA
Proportional constant of the conveyor element. The parameter designates the flow rate for
a flow of 1 mA at the output P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level.
P23.07 Dead Time TT Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Transport times between the regulated conveyor element (control element) and the bin if
the transporting feeder element has a fixed conveying speed.
P23.08 P-Component KP Default: 0 mA/kg

Min: 0 mA/kg Max: 10000 mA/kg
Proportional component of the fill level controller.
An I controller results at KP = 0 that leads to a control circuit with an instable structure with
this regulation. This setting should therefore be avoided.
P23.09 I-Component TN Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the controller integral component for the bin fill level. The integral component
reaches the same magnitude during this period as the proportion with a constant control
deviation.
The integral component is switched off at P23.09 I-Component TN = 0.
P23.10 D Portion TV Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Differential component of the bin fill level controller.
The differential component is switched off if P23.10 D Portion TV = 0.
P23.11 D Filter TD Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Filter time constant for the differential component.
This value should not be greater than the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 * P23.10 is normal.
Also refer to: P23.10 D Portion TV

Parameters
P23.12 Bypass Default: 10 mA

Constant for pilot control of the conveyor into a bin that is emptied by the continuous scale.
This constant describes the current as a controller magnitude that produces a flow rate at
the conveyor bin corresponding to the nominal flow rate (P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate) of the
continuous scale.
The bypass is adjusted so that the fill level of the bin is retained (outflow = inflow) if the
controller is switched off (P23.08 P-Component KP, P23.09 I-Component TN, P23.10 D
Portion TV = 0) and the scale is switched on.
The bypass can be changed in small increments until the service value yBi oscillates
around 0, even if the controller is active.
(The designs with different signs apply correspondingly to P23.02 Filling Type = NO.)
P23.13 Bypass D Portion Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
In critical circumstances such as with a small hopper or long dead time, the D portion for
the bypass can relieve the controller if there are large changes in weighfeeder setpoints.
The control deviation time interval can be minimized.
Recommendation: 0 under normal circumstances and approximately TT/2 (P23.07 Dead
Time TT) under critical circumstances
P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Increase of the actuating variable for the conveyor element.
In general parameters P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P23.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.
P23.15 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Internal lower threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
In general parameters P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P23.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.
P23.16 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.

Parameters
P23.17 Dead Band Deviation Default: 0 kg

The effective control deviation Xd(w) at the controller input can be reduced by the factor of
P23.18 Dead Band Factor within a range of ± P23.17 Dead Band Deviation. This can bring
about more settled (slower) control in the stable state (near the setpoint) for the bin weight
with malfunctions in the weight signal.
P23.18 Dead Band Factor Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 1
Factor for the control deviation for a fill level close to the setpoint.
Also refer to: P23.17 Dead Band Deviation
P23.19 Setpoint Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
The setpoint filter for the fill level setpoint.
This can prevent overshoot with setpoint changes effected by the check system (KME).
P23.20 Flow Rate Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
Time constant for the filter in the fill level actual value. Rapid control reaction requires a low
time constant.
The value set is automatically taken into account by the calibration program BIN: Controller
Optimization'.
P23.21 DI: Init. Controller Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Contact initializes all parts of the controller that store information. Bypass and increase only
are active as long as this is applied.
P23.22 Bin Setpoint source Default: PARAMETER

Alternative: PARAMETER
FB
This parameter defines whether the fill level setpoint is given by parameter P23.05 Setpoint
Bin Level or by the fieldbus interface (ID: hex 0x0266 or dec 614).

Parameters
P23.24 Stepper Default: no Stepper

Alternative: no Stepper
additional Stepper
only Stepper
An additional step controller can be activated to the control unit of a position-controlled
prefeeder (feed gate or roller) for the bin controller. The simplified diagram of the controller
can be found in the appendix. The position controller controls the prefeeder with the digital
'Open' and 'Close' signals.
No stepper: only the continuous controller is active

Only stepper: only the position controller is active
Additional stepper: A position controller tops
the continuous controller
The parameter of the continuous controller: P23.07 Dead Time TT - P23.22 Bin Setpoint
source
The parameter of the position controller: P23.25 S: P-Component - P23.41 Position MAX
Flow Gate(B)
P23.25 S: P-Component Default: 0.033 s/%

Min: 0 s/% Max: 1000 s/%
The proportional component of the step controller in transit time per % of deviation (in per-
cent of P22.09 Nominal Bin Load)
P23.26 S: I-Component Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The reset time of the fill level controller is the time after which the same controller magni-
tude develops on the output of the integrator with a constant deviation as through the pro-
portional component.
The integral component serves to avoid a permanent deviation. When the reset time is too
small, it makes the control circuit instable.
The integral component is switched off for TN = 0 s and the controller works as a three-
point switch.
P23.27 S: D-Component Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The factor for the differential component of the fill level controller. The differential compo-
nent can improve the control quality with long conveying routes to the bin. When the value
is too large, it makes the control circuit instable.

Parameters
P23.28 S: Threshold Resp. Default: 0.1 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The trigger threshold is used to prevent constant small positioning movements around the
operating point. The prefeeder stands still if the deviation is smaller than P23.28.
The trigger threshold should be greater than the smallest possible step of the actuator.
Special case: threshold = 0 %: The smallest allowed trigger threshold has an internal effect.
P23.29 S: Compensation Element Default: 0 1/s

Min: 0 1/s Max: 60000 1/s
The compensation element is an additional integrator in the control deviation branch for
preventing contouring errors with prefeeders that have characteristics that change mono-
tonically or a feed rate of the continuous feeder that changes monotonically. It is used
for the
- overcoming the trigger threshold.
- reducing contouring errors with monotonically changing malfunctions.
The input and output of the compensation element are limited to 5 %.

Special case: P23.29 S: Compensation Element = 0: The Integrator is deleted.
P23.30 S: DO Open Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the 'open the prefeeder in the bin' command.
With systems with several VCU for the continuous scale:

The output should preferably be on the main VCU to prevent signal running times.
P23.31 S: DO Close Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the 'close the prefeeder in the bin' command.
With systems with several VCU for the continuous scale:

The output should preferably be on the main VCU to prevent signal running times.
P23.32 AI: Position Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
The definition of the input channel for the position return signal of the prefeeder.
Also refer to: P23.33 AI: Offset (B), P23.34 AI: Range (B)

Parameters
P23.33 AI: Offset (B) Default: 4 mA

The flow of the feedback signal for the 'closed' position of the prefeeder to the bin.
Also refer to: P23.32 AI: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.34 AI: Range (B)
P23.34 AI: Range (B) Default: 20 mA

The current of the feedback signal for the '100 %' signal of the prefeeder to the bin where
this position is supposed to correspond to a flow of bulk solids at the size of the nominal
flow rate of the continuous scale (P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate).
Also refer to: P23.32 AI: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.33 AI: Offset (B)
P23.35 AO: Position Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the output for the position of the prefeeder in the bin as information to an
external control unit.
Also refer to: P23.36 AO: Offset (B), P23.37 AO: Range (B)
P23.36 AO: Offset (B) Default: 4 mA

Output current for the 'closed' position of the prefeeder in the bin.
Also refer to: P23.35 AO: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.37 AO: Range (B)
P23.37 AO: Range (B) Default: 20 mA

Output current for the prefeeder 100 % open position in the bin.
Also refer to: P23.35 AO: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.36 AO: Offset (B)

Parameters
P23.38 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) Default: W2

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the smallest open-
ing.
Possible causes:
- defect in the adjustment of the prefeeder control (control parameter P23.25 S: P-
Component - P23.29 S: Compensation Element)
- defect in the prefeeder's performance drive
- the prefeeder is leaky and bulk solids are flowing even when the prefeeder is closed
- the limit switch is incorrectly set
Actions:
- check the controller settings
- check the mechanical equipment of the prefeeder and limit switch
P23.39 Position MIN Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder to the
bin. When the limit switch responds, no other 'close' signal is generated to protect the pre-
feeder's mechanical equipment. The event P23.38 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) is identified.
Note: The limit switch does not have any limiting impact on the controller. The controller
can go into saturation if the limit switch responds. This is why the limit position should be
clearly outside of the normal setting range.
P23.40 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) Default: W2

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the largest opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:

Parameters
P23.41 Position MAX Flow Gate(B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder to the
bin. If the limit switch responds, no other 'open' signal is generated to protect the prefeed-
er's mechanical equipment. The event P23.40 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) is identified.
Note: The limit switch does not have any limiting impact on the controller. The controller
can go into saturation if the limit switch responds. This is why the limit position should be
clearly outside of the normal setting range.
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Check System

The check system controls and corrects a continuous scales using the change in bin weight; the changes in
weight result only from the bulk material passing over continuous scales. During measurement all other in-
and outflows must be stopped.
A signals flow chart for control can be found in the appendix.
P24.01 Type of Check System Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Single Unit
Filling System
Extern
Selects the control concept
NO:
No check system
Single unit:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin form a mechanical unit and are
weighed together. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Separated Units:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin are decoupled both mechanically and
with regards to weighing. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Filling system:
The continuous weighfeeder fills the control bin during the check.
External:
The control procedure is controlled by a higher-order system. The DISOCONT Tersus only
supplies the relevant measured values.
The following parameters only are effective:
- P24.22 DO: Check Measurement Active
- P24.25 Absolute Range
- P24.26 Relative Range
The following parameter description relates primarily to the single unit and separated units
types.
The appendix has a flow chart.

Parameters
P24.02 Auto Correction Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Setting for the correction unit once measurement is finished.
NO: Correction must be started manually

YES: Correction is performed automatically if the correction result lies within the set thre-
sholds (P24.25 Absolute Range, P24.26 Relative Range).
P24.03 Cyclic Auto Start Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Tare
Span
Automatic start of the check system.
NO:
No automatic start
Tare:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting tare or additive effects of errors.
Span:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting the proportionality factor between the meas-
ured value and actual feed rate. Correction of multiplicatively acting effects of errors.
It starts after a pause preselected with the parameters P24.04 Cycle Time. It also makes
sense to preselect automatic correction (P24.02 Auto Correction = YES).
P24.04 Cycle Time Default: 0.5 h

Min: 0 h Max: 100 h
With automatic start selected, the standby time between the end of one check and the start
of the next.
Also refer to: P24.03 Cyclic Auto Start
P24.05 Release Check System Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
Defines the input that will activate a check by the system controller.
If no active signal given:

1. no check will be started
2. a running check will be canceled.
The setting 'n/a' makes the check system continuously active.

Parameters
P24.06 Event: No Check Release Default: W2

Event Group: CH Number: 09
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized
one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing
authorization.
P24.07 Check Start Span Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a
range correction.
P24.08 Check Start Tare Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a
tare correction.
P24.09 Accept Correction Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determine the signal source for correction of the continuous scales on the basis of the out-
come of the check system.
Once measurement has ended the check system moves to the acknowledgement phase
and waits for the correcting command, when P24.02 Auto Correction = NO. Corrections can
also by made manually if the tolerances P24.25 Absolute Range or P24.26 Relative Range
have been exceeded. Correction is triggered by the input flank.

Parameters
P24.10 Finish Check Measurement Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determines the source of the signal for canceling a running check. The command acts in all
phases of measurement. The calibration of the continuous scale is not changed by the
cancellation. The input is flank-controlled.
The check must be canceled if the measuring system is in acknowledgement phase and if
the control outcome is not to be used to correct the continuous scales.
P24.11 Check Quantity Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The quantity of bulk solids that should be discharged as a check.
The quantity selected should be large enough to minimize the effects of errors when deter-
mining the control quantity. By the same token the hopper should have sufficient capacity
for the control quantity.
P24.12 Storage Quantity Default: 500 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level for the start of a check. If needed,
material will be filled to this level before measurement begins.
Preconditions:
1. The storage quantity must be smaller than the max. control fill level: P24.12 < P24.15
Maximum Fill Weight.
If this condition is not met, the check will end after starting with the message CH 03 (max.
check fill level).
P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Bulk material buffer that must remain in the hopper during a check so that the flow charac-
teristics and the material density at the feeding point do not change significantly.
The measurement would cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level) if the ma-
terial quantity falls below this amount.

Parameters
P24.14 Event: Minimum Fill Weight Default: W1

The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight during a
check. The control measurement is finished early.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density greater than specified
- unfavorable adjustment of P24.11 Check Quantity or P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight or
P24.12 Storage Quantity
P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The maximum check fill weight is the greatest fill level allowed during a check. The measur-
ing period will not begin until the fill level falls below this value.
The permissible operating range of the control measurement within the bin fill level is de-
termined by the two threshold values Min P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight and Max P24.15
Maximum Fill Weight.
P24.16 Event: Maximum Fill Weight Default: W1

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is fi-
nished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P24.12 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill
level (P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts. In case
of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
P24.17 Damping Time Default: 3 s

The waiting period from switching off filling to starting the control measurement. The
process variables should stabilize within this period. This time is also observed even if the
bin was not filled shortly beforehand.
P24.18 DO: Control Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message 'control active'.
The signal is active from the start of the control until successful correction or cancellation.

Parameters
P24.19 Feeder Stopped Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
The 'On/Off' feedback from the filling element. The settling time (P24.17 Damping Time)
starts with the 'Off' signal when the check has started. The check will wait for the feedback
signal (the P24.20 Event: Feeder Not Stopped event) before starting the settling time if
filling is switched on.
The check will be canceled without a response if the 'conveying element ON' feedback is
received after starting settling time.
P24.20 Event: Feeder Not Stopped Default: W1

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
P24.21 Event: Prepare Check Measurement Default: W2

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than
the maximum check fill level (P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
P24.22 DO: Check Measurement Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message that the check system is in the measuring
phase.

Parameters
P24.23 Event: Expect Acceptance Default: W2

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded
(P24.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
P24.24 DO:Expect Acceptance Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the information that the check system is waiting for
the operator's decision at the end.
The output is independent of the event class.
Also refer to: P24.23 Event: Expect Acceptance
P24.25 Absolute Range Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the sum of all previous corrections.
Correction will not be made automatically if the threshold would be exceeded by a check.
An event will be identified in each case.
See also:
P24.27 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
P24.29 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
P24.26 Relative Range Default: 3 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the currently pending correction.
Correction will not be made automatically if the error overshoots the threshold. An event will
be identified in each case.
See also:
P24.28 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
P24.30 Event: Relative Span Correction Error

Parameters
P24.27 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the
threshold value P24.25 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration. There is no
automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result
manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction
weighting factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analy-
sis.
Cause of the event:

- substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station)
- defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects)
Actions:
- checking the weighing station of the feeder scale
- taring the feeder scale
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
P24.28 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error Default: W1

The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P24.26
Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic correction. The
operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is monitored and
reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P24.31 Correction
Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)

Parameters
P24.29 Event: Absolute Span Correction Default: W1

Error
The threshold in P24.25 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for
multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.01 Range Correction
P24.30 Event: Relative Span Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P24.26 Relative
Range.
Brel = (1 - B ) × 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
P24.31 Correction Evaluation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
The extent of the correction is determined by the factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation.
There is no correction with P24.31 = 0 and the complete defect ascertained is corrected
with P24.31 = 1.
P24.31 = 1 is normally set for the first control measurement to make a basic setting. Sub-
sequent corrections, in particular when checks are automatically started, are normally car-
ried out with P24.31 < 1. This makes it possible to filter the control results and eliminate
random measuring errors in the control measurement.
P24.32 Correction Speed Default: 0 s

To ensure that the correction does not bring about any feed rate jumps, it can be automati-
cally carried out in small steps. If 0 is entered, it is corrected
in one step. P24.32 defines the time between two steps of 0.1% of the nominal load (at tare
correction) or 0.1% of P10.01 Range Correction (with range correction).

Parameters
P24.33 AO: Check Measurement Result Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the analog output channel for the result of the control (loss in bin weight) / (ad-
vancement in continuous scales counter). Updating is made at the start of an acknowled-
gement phase. The output value is retained until the next acknowledgement phase. The
correction quantification in P24.31 Correction Evaluation is disregarded at output.
Signal scaling is linear between 4 ... 20 mA = 0.9 ... 1.1.

Examples:
4 mA = 0.9
12 mA = 1
20 mA = 1.1
P24.34 DO: Check Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P24.01 Type of
Check System = Filling System).
Procedure: the control gate will divert the material either through the normal conveyance
path or into the control bin. The correct position of the control gate can be monitored by the
digital input 'Echo Control Gate' (P24.35 Check Gate Feedback).
P24.35 Check Gate Feedback Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter only relates to the check by weight increase in the bin (P24.01 Type of
Check System = filling system).
Defines the input channel for the position return signal from the control gate. The return
signal is not monitored with the setting 'n/a'.
If there is no feedback from the control gate within the monitoring time (P24.36 Check Gate
Time), the 'control gate error' event is set and the KME is canceled.
Also refer to: P24.34 DO: Check Gate, P24.37 Event: Check Gate Error

Parameters
P24.36 Check Gate Time Default: 0 s

Tolerated time allowed for the control gate to move between command and position return
signal.
Also refer to:

P24.34 DO: Check Gate
P24.35 Check Gate Feedback
P24.37 Event: Check Gate Error
P24.37 Event: Check Gate Error Default: W1

The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P24.36 Check Gate Time
P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 10000 %
The bin fill level is measured at the start and the end of the measuring phase. Both measur-
ing points are monitored for disturbances in the measurement.
If the malfunctions exceed the threshold value in P24.38, another attempt at measuring will
be started after a time defined by P24.17 Damping Time. However, if this attempt also re-
turns excessively high malfunctions, the check will be canceled, the results discarded and
an event identified (P24.39 Event: Bin Error). Disturbances are not monitored if the setting
is 0 %.
How to set:
1. set the threshold to 10,000 %
2. Monitor the service display 'KME Window' during the check procedure
and note the max. value.
3. enter approximately 3 times the value in the parameter P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error.

Parameters
P24.39 Event: Bin Error Default: W1

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check.
The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has
been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error
P24.40 DO: Correction Error Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for displaying an error condition of the control measurement.
The output is set if one of the events CH 04 - CH 07 occurs (measuring result lies outside
tolerance levels). The check is finished, although the correction has not been carried out.
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Moisture

For certain processes, other units than units of weight per time may be more relevant to the feeding
process. One example is bulk material moisture. The relevant parameter is not the weight of the moist ma-
terial but rather the weight of the dry material.
The measuring system can correct bulk solid properties such as these. This requires that the disturbance
variable, e.g. the moisture or ash content, be measured and the result sent to the system. The measuring
system then calculates the bulk solid components relevant to the process and feeds it instead of the total
weight.
P25.01 Moisture Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The actual feed rate can be corrected with the moisture block. The corrected value will
always be used for the controller input and the batch counter if moisture correction is active.
The pulses for an external counter can be issued configured with P25.14 Pulse Counter
corrected, corrected or not corrected.
NO: No correction
YES: Weight signal is corrected
The parameters relevant to moisture correction are visible only when correction is active.

Parameters
P25.02 Moisture Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture con-
tent.
Also refer to:

P25.04 Nominal Moisture
P25.05 Moisture Offset
P25.06 Moisture Range
P25.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 20 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.
Also refer to:

P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P25.05 Moisture Offset
P25.06 Moisture Range
P25.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4 mA

Current for a correction value of 0%
Reference value: P25.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P25.06 Moisture Range
P25.06 Moisture Range Default: 20 mA

Current for a correction value of 100%
Reference value: P25.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P25.05 Moisture Offset

Parameters
P25.07 DO: Moisture active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for signal "Correction active".
Also refer to: P25.02 Moisture Select
P25.08 Moisture MAX Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P25.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has ex-
ceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P25.08 Moisture MAX, P25.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P25.10 Event: Moisture MAX Default: W1

The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been ex-
ceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P25.08 Moisture MAX, P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX
P25.11 AO: Flow Rate corrected Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P25.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P25.13 AO: Flow Rate Range

Parameters
P25.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Ausgangsstrom für eine Leistung von 0 %.
P25.13 AO: Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

Ausgangsstrom für eine Leistung von 100 %.
P25.14 Pulse Counter corrected Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.
NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity

YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction
factor, e.g. moisture.
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Additional device

device
P26.01 Auto Zero Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The preselection of the automatic zeroing equipment that corrects the zero point in opera-
tion without bulk solids.
The conditions for identifying the fact that bulk solids is not flowing:
- platform load < P26.02 Auto Zero Limit
- measurement switched off
Also refer to:

P10.04 Zeroing Limit
P26.03 Event: Tare Correction

Parameters
P26.02 Auto Zero Limit Default: 2 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 100 % Q
The threshold value for starting automatic zero setting. The zeroing system only ascertains
the mean value of the load if the load is below the threshold value. This is corrected in
P10.03 Tare Correction when the total of all zero settings is below the threshold in P10.04
Zeroing Limit. When the threshold is exceeded in P10.04, it is not corrected and the system
reports Event: Tare Correction.
Reference: nominal load (service value)
Also refer to: P26.01 Auto Zero Active
P26.03 Event: Tare Correction Default: W1

The event is identified when the total of the corrections of zero settings would be in excess
of the threshold value in P10.04 Zeroing Limit.
Possible causes:
- substantial build-up of bulk material on the measuring chute
- substantial air flow in the meter
- shunt forces from the measuring chute against the non-stationary part
Actions:
- check the measuring equipment
- clean the equipment
Also refer to:

P26.01 Auto Zero Active
P26.02 Auto Zero Limit
P26.04 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The zero drop out function sets the display of the flow rate to zero when the load drops
below the threshold value in P26.04 Zero Drop-Out Active. This prevents the totalizing
counter from running on if measuring continues for a longer period while no bulk material
flows. This suppresses small, unavoidable tare errors.
YES: activate the Zero Drop Out system.

NO: Zero Drop Out has no effect. The small operating range is displayed at the measured
value.

Parameters
P26.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1 % Io

Totalizing is suppressed with measurements below this limit to ensure that the counter
remains constant.
No feature appears on the display.
Reference: Flow Rate Units
P26.06 DO: Agitator ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel used to switch on the agitator in the feeder hopper.
Also refer to: P26.07 START Agitator
P26.07 START Agitator Default: 30 % Io

Threshold value at which the agitator is switched on. The agitator is switched on by P26.06
DO: Agitator ON 30 seconds after the setpoint has exceeded the threshold for a feeder in
an on-state. The agitator switches off with no delay when the feeder is switched off.
Reference: Flow Rate Units
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Dead Time

The system allows the switch-on command and setpoints to be delayed. This is a useful function if several
consecutive feeders operate as a collective system and the batch must be correct at all times. The first
feeder receives the control commands instantaneously, the following feeder receives them after a delay
corresponding to the transit time of the bulk material from the first feeder to the collection point (= dead
time).
P27.01 Dead Time Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Setpoint + ON/OFF
Setpoint
ON/OFF
There is a dead time element for the setpoint and ON/OFF command each, each of which
can be activated separately.
NO: no dead-time active

Setpoint: dead-time active for the setpoint only
ON/OFF: dead-time for ON/OFF only active
Setpoint + ON/OF: dead-time for setpoint and ON/OFF active

Parameters
P27.02 Dead Time Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
The value for dead time is valid for start/stop commands and setpoint changes.
P27.03 Setpoint Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Activates the setpoint delay. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P27.04 Setpoint Clock ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay
should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P27.05 ON/OFF Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Activates the delay for start/stop commands. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with
no delay.
P27.06 ON/OFF Clock ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay
should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P27.07 Time Elements Preassign Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With this command the timing elements are preallocated with the current setpoint or
the current ON/OFF command.

Parameters
P27.08 Initialise Time Elements Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The setpoint element is preallocated with ZERO at initialization and the ON/OFF element is
preallocated with OFF.
P27.09 DO: Dead Time Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint or active dead-time ON/OFF.
P27.10 DO: Setpoint Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint.
P27.11 DO: ON/OFF Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output active dead-time ON/OFF.
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Interlocking

The parameters of this group configure the system's predefined events and running messages.
Also refer to the interlocking logic circuit diagram in chapter 'Appendix'.
P28.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P28.06 DI: Event Electricity 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P28.09 DO: Event Mechanics Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.

Parameters
P28.10 Event: Mechanics Default: W1

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P28.11 DO: Event Electricity Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P28.12 Event: Electricity Default: W1

P28.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P28.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P28.15 Event: Mechatronics Default: W1

P28.16 DO: Ready Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P28.17 Event: Not Ready Default: W1

P28.18 DO: Ready for Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P28.19 Event: Not Ready for Start Default: W1

7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - FCB analog outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical analog outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P29.01 FCB_AO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P29.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 Default: 4 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 0.
P29.03 Range FCB_AO 1 Default: 20 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 100%
Reference value: P29.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters
P29.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 Default: 1000

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.
Also refer to: P29.01 FCB_AO 01, P29.03 Range FCB_AO 1

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
P29.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P29.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P29.04 Reference FCB_AO 1

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Parameters

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
P29.21 FCB Variant Default: Empty
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the pa-
rameter when a new link is loaded. When the system is started after turning on the voltage,
it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same as the
name entered in the parameter. Event P29.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names
are different.
This check serves as a control if a replacement part is used.
P29.22 Event: FCB-Error Default: A

This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link
stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states
may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
- load the function block link with the correct name.
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - FCB digital outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical binary outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P30.01 FCB_DO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Data Logging

The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
P31.01 Hourly Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 59 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a full
hour.
P31.02 Daily Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 1439 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a day.

Parameters
P31.03 Logger cycle time Default: 1 min

Min: 1 min Max: 1439 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P31.04 ... P31.13.
P31.04 Data Log Value 1 Default: 752
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the data communication manual.
Also refer to:

P31.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:
Similar to P31.04 Data Log Value 1

Parameters
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Configuration HMI Values

The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the oper-
ating panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation
map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data com-
munication:
P32.01 HMI Value 01 Default: 1872
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Linearization
P33.01 Linearization ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Load measuring can be linearized with this parameters.
The 4 linearization points can be determined by calibration with calibration weights or using
material. Not required or not measured points must be laid either outside the measuring
range or must be interpolated.
Consider the location of the linearization in the signal processing (--> appendix).
Detailed calibration instructions are in the appendix.
P33.02 Linearization S1 Default: 25 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 1:
Correct feedrate at the input of the linearization.
P33.03 Linearization I1 Default: 25 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
The meter's actual flow rate at linearization point 1.
This point can be approximately calculated as follows:
P33.03(new) = P33.03(old) * mc/ms

P33.03(old): the value that was active during the measurement
mc: the progress of the count of the totalized amount of material during the measurement
ms: the actual amount of bulk solids determined on an external static scale

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 2.
Otherwise as P33.02 Linearization S1

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Refer to P33.03 Linearization I1 for a description

Parameters

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
P33.10 Event: Linearization Error Default: W2

Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - Flow Gate

The parameters of this group are only relevant if the prefeeder is designed as a position-regulated feed gate
(P11.01 Controller Type) for the bulk solids to the feeder scale.
P34.01 S: DO Open Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for opening the position-controlled prefeeder. With
DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).

Parameters
P34.02 S: DO Close Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for closing the position-controlled prefeeder. With
DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P34.03 AI: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
The definition of the input channel for the feedback signal for the position of the prefeeder.
Also refer to:

P34.04 AI: Offset
P34.05 AI: Range
P34.04 AI: Offset Default: 4 mA

The input current at the 'just closed' position of the feed gate.
P34.05 AI: Range Default: 20 mA

The input current for the nominal position is 100 %. There should be a material flow of 100
% of the nominal operating range P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate at the nominal position under
nominal conditions for the bulk solids.
P34.06 AO: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the analog output channel with the information on the position of the pre-
feeder to external equipment. Norming via P34.07 AO: Offset and P34.08 AO: Range
P34.07 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the 0 % prefeeder position is opened ('just closed').
P34.08 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the 100 % prefeeder position is opened ('just completely closed').

Parameters
P34.09 Event: MIN Flow Gate Default: W2

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum
position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Defects in the prefeeder control unit
Actions:
Check the control unit.
P34.10 Position MIN Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal from the limit switch on the prefeeder for
the minimum open position.
P34.11 Event: MAX Flow Gate Default: W2

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum
position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
P34.12 Position MAX Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder for the
maximum open position.
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Local Mode (Speed)

The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the
drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs.
This block contains the parameters for continually functioning drives, feed gates (rollers) with built-in posi-
tion control or valves.
Each VMO can control as many as 5 drives. The parameters for these drives are marked with block num-
bers 1 - 5 in this group of parameters.

Parameters
You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix.
Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communica-
tion VMO20100-Unit 2.
Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the pa-
rameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.
P35.01 Motor Select (Block 1) Default: VMO1 Motor1

Alternative: VMO1 Motor1
VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active
Selecting the drives in VMO that is assigned to parameter block 1. It is then operated in
VMO with the appropriate line.
VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P35.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The signal running through the selected output channel is linked with the ON command for
the drive. When the output becomes active, the drive is shown in VMO as running. The
drive can be switched on and off via VMO in local operation .
n/a: The drive in VMO is not linked with any signal. This motor should be deactivated in
VMO.
P35.03 Controller Magnitude (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The signal running over the selected output channel is linked to the controller magnitude for
the drive. The value of the controller magnitude is shown in VMO and can be specified in
VMO in local operation.
n/a: The drive is not linked to any signal. This setting is selected when the drive is operated
at a constant speed.

Parameters
P35.04 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) Default: 0 mA

The controller magnitude flow where the motor stops right out of rotating operation so that it
no longer conveys bulk solids.
P35.05 JOG enable (Block 1) Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activating switching on the drive even with a defect.
NO: The drive cannot be switched on with an alarm.
YES: When there is an alarm, the motor can still be started in local operation of VMO.
However, it only runs until the start button is pressed. This operating mode only makes
sense with belt drives that have to be started with belt drift to move the belt into normal
position again.
P35.06 Release local Start (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The
VMO can only be switched in local operation when this signal is on. This input makes it
possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the host computer.
n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time.
Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to

be set in VMO.
P35.07 DI: External Error 1 (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal.
Exception: Refer to P35.05 JOG enable (Block 1)
The malfunction inputs P35.07, P35.08 and P35.09 work at the same priority. The drive
cannot be switched on in local operation if there is one of these malfunctions.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal.
P35.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the 'drive is running' signal. The output is active
precisely when the output defined via P35.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) is also active.
P35.11 Motor Select (Block 2) Default: VMO1 Motor2

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P35.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to
P35.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS

Parameters


Alternative: NO
YES

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO
P35.21 Motor Select (Block 3) Default: not active

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS


Parameters

Alternative: NO
YES

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS


Alternative: NO
YES

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS


Alternative: NO
YES

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DO
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - Local Mode (Gate)

The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the
drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs.
This block contains the parameters for position-controlled prefeeders that are controlled by the VCU with the
'Open' and 'Closed' signals.
You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix.
Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communica-
tion VMO20100-Unit 2.
Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the pa-
rameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.

Parameters
P36.01 Motor Select Default: VMO1 Motor5

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active
Select the drive in VMO that is assigned the parameter block. It is then operated in VMO
with the appropriate line.
VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P36.02 OPEN in Remote Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The definition of the output channels for the 'open feed gate' signal.
P36.03 DI: Limit Switch OPEN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 'feed gate open in end position' signal. The limit
switch stops the further operation of the slide gate in the OPEN direction to protect the me-
chanical equipment.
P36.04 CLOSE in Remote Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The definition of the output channels for the 'close feed gate' signal.
P36.05 DI: Limit Switch CLOSE Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 'feed gate is closed in end position' signal. The
limit switch stops the further operation of the slide gate in the CLOSED direction to protect
the mechanical equipment.

Parameters
P36.06 Release local Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The
VMO can only be switched in local operation when this signal is on. This input makes it
possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the host computer.
n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time.
Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to

be set in VMO.
P36.07 DI: External Error 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal.
The malfunction inputs P36.07, P36.08 and P36.09 work at the same priority.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal.

Event Messages
8 Event Messages
DANGER
Events register abnormal states, e.g. malfunctions or exceeded thre-
shold values.
A running feeder can be a hazard to people or to property.
The cause of event messages must be corrected before events are ac-
knowledged!
Event messages are grouped together.

Group Identifier Event Domain
SY Internally monitoring the control system

SC Irregularities in operator control or peripheral control
WE Fault in the external power electronics
WM Fault in the mechanical system
MF Fault in the bulk material flow
IL Messages from interlocking with system control
CO Internal controller malfunction message
CA Adjustment fault
HI Threshold value exceeded upwards
LO Threshold value exceeded downwards
Tab. 36 : Event groups
Note:
In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
8.1 Events Details
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration

CA01 Event: Error LC Input (P07.03)
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted.
The load cell may be faulty.
Measures:
- check the load cell
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switch-
ed on even after the error has been rectified.

Event Messages
CA03 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) (P22.07)

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted.
The load cell may be faulty.
Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be
switched on even after the error has been rectified.
CA05 Event: Linearization Error (P33.10)

Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
CA06 Event: Tare Correction (P26.03)

The event is identified when the total of the corrections of zero settings would be in
excess of the threshold value in P10.04 Zeroing Limit.
Possible causes:
- substantial build-up of bulk material on the measuring chute
- substantial air flow in the meter
- shunt forces from the measuring chute against the non-stationary part
Actions:
- check the measuring equipment
- clean the equipment
Also refer to:

P26.01 Auto Zero Active
P26.02 Auto Zero Limit
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement

CH02 Event: Minimum Fill Weight (P24.14)
The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight dur-
ing a check. The control measurement is finished early.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density greater than specified
- unfavorable adjustment of P24.11 Check Quantity or P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight
or P24.12 Storage Quantity

Event Messages
CH03 Event: Maximum Fill Weight (P24.16)

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is
finished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P24.12 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control
fill level (P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts.
In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
CH04 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error (P24.27)

The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than
the threshold value P24.25 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration.
There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and
enter the result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement
phase. The correction weighting factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation is not taken into
account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unload-
ing)
CH05 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error (P24.28)

The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value
P24.26 Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic
correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manual-
ly. It is monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction
weighting factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error
analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unload-
ing)

Event Messages
CH06 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error (P24.29)

The threshold in P24.25 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections
for multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.01 Range Correction
CH07 Event: Relative Span Correction Error (P24.30)

The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P24.26 Rela-
tive Range.
Brel = (1 - B ) × 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
CH08 Event: Feeder Not Stopped (P24.20)

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
CH09 Event: No Check Release (P24.06)

This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not au-
thorized one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the
missing authorization.
CH10 Event: Prepare Check Measurement (P24.21)

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still great-
er than the maximum check fill level (P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.

Event Messages
CH11 Event: Expect Acceptance (P24.23)

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is
exceeded (P24.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
CH12 Event: Check Gate Error (P24.37)

This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P24.01
Type of Check System = Filling System).
The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P24.36 Check Gate Time
CH13 Event: Bin Error (P24.39)

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the
check. The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the
event class has been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error
8.1.3 Event Group:

Group: Controller
CO01 Event: Controller Limited (P07.13)
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response
threshold. After a time message HI05 (P07.12) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service
value Y). At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.

Event Messages
CO02 Event: MIN Flow Gate (P34.09)

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the mini-
mum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO03 Event: MAX Flow Gate (P34.11)

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maxi-
mum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO04 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor (P22.29)

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not
shutting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P22.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false

adjustment of the calculation of the feed rate.
CO06 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) (P23.40)

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the largest
opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:

Event Messages
CO10 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) (P23.38)

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the smallest
opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System

WE01 Event: Power Failure (P07.07)
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event
must first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales
will restart.
WE02 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 (P13.09)

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Event Messages

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:
WE08 Event: Analog Input < Offset (P07.15)

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input
signal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.

Event Messages
WE13 Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 (P13.21)

Possible cause:
WE14 Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 (P13.22)

Possible cause:
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock

IL01 Event: Run Disabled (P04.06)
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not
switched on.
IL02 Event: Mechanics (P28.10)

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic
diagram.
IL03 Event: Electricity (P28.12)

diagram.
IL04 Event: Mechatronics (P28.15)

diagram.
IL05 Event: Not Ready (P28.17)

diagram.

Event Messages
IL06 Event: Not Ready for Start (P28.19)

diagram.
IL10 Event: FCB-Error (P29.22)

This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the
link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating
states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
- load the function block link with the correct name.
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow

MF05 Event: Moisture MAX (P25.10)
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has
been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P25.08 Moisture MAX, P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX
MF06 Event: Out of Tolerance (P15.21)

The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces

Event Messages
MF07 Event: Batch setpoint Limit (P15.25)

Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible
upper limit in P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX

HI01 Event: LC Input > MAX (P07.05)
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal
loads of the load cells.

Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX (P09.04)

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too large

Event Messages
HI05 Event: Deviation (P07.12)

Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the
setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
- material has been incorrectly handled:
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
- the controller has at times come against its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output
regulator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical
value that minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable
operation.
Also refer to: P07.11 Deviation abs. max., P07.10 Factor Deviation, P07.09 Thre-
shold Deviation, P07.08 Time Deviation
HI10 Event: LC Input > MAX (P22.08)

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI11 Event: Bin Level MAX (P22.19)

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly

Event Messages
8.1.8 Event Group: MIN

LO01 Event: LC Input < MIN (P07.04)
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.
Possible causes:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN (P09.02)

The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate
MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too low
LO11 Event: Bin Level MIN (P22.16)

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring

SC01 Event: Setpoint Limited (P07.06)
Cause of the event:
Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate in
volumetric operation.
SC02 Event: Stand-By (P07.01)

Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is
smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder
drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.

Event Messages
SC03 Event: Maint.Feeder Run (P16.04)

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03
Maintenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC04 Event: Maint. Electric (P16.02)

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time
P16.01 Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC05 Event: External Event 1 (P13.01)

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive



8.1.10 Event Group: System Message

SY01 Event: Memory (P07.14)
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred
during that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.

Event Messages
SY02 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 (P01.06)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY03 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 (P01.10)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY04 Event: Communication HMI 1 (P02.06)

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.

Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.

Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
SY07 Event: Communication VHM serial (P02.11)

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM
operating panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485
Address)

Event Messages
SY08 Event: Cyclic Communication (P18.03)

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P18.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10 Event: Acyclic Communication (P18.04)

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
SY15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 (P01.13)

This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.
SY16 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 (P01.15)

This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.

Appendix
9 Appendix
Details of special functions are described in this chapter.
9.1 Setpoint and switch-

switch-on sources
Setpoint can be set and feed on and off commands can come from different sources.
Fig. 13: Setpoint and switch-on sources
The sources are preselected with parameters in the 'Control Sources' group.
You can use the OP Mode function to switch back and forth between the pre-selected sources and the key-
board (Keyboard Mode ON/OFF [➙ 27]).
Parameters Function Source

P04.01 Feeder Start OP = keyboard
FB = fieldbus
DI = contact
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint OP = keyboard
FB = fieldbus
AI = analog input (A/D)
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint n/a = not assigned
Setpoint with a percentage quantifier OP = keyboard
AI = Analog input
The effective setpoint is displayed on the operating panel. The setpoint input field is only available if the
inputs from the operating panel are allowed by parameter.
A new window for entering the relative component will open when the setpoint field is touched if the relative
setpoint qualifier was pre-selected with the operating panel.

Appendix
Setpoint Synchronization:
The external setpoint will be taken if the source of the setpoint is switched from an external source to the
keyboard (OP). The external source will take effect in the opposite direction.
On / Off Synchronization:
The on/off switch status is retained when switching from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The ex-
ternal source will take effect in the opposite direction.
Mains Power OFF:
The keyboard setpoints are stored.
The flow chart of the start and stop sequence
Fig. 14: The start and stop sequence
Time Condition
1 Feeding does not begin with the on command since the all-clear signal has not been given.
2 To start, the scale requires the rising slope of a start command.
3 Feeding is started with the rising slope.
4 Flow rate control will operate in volumetric operation (also refer to: Volumetric / (Volumetric Syn-
chronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation) during the start up time defined by T1 =
P06.01.
5 Changing over in normal gravimetrically controlled feeding operation (assuming gravimetric mode
was previously selected). Control stays in volumetric mode (assuming it was previously selected by
the operator).
6 Feeding will be switched off if there is no all-clear signal (or if the switch on command was removed).
7 Flow rate recording continues over the time set by T2 = P06.02 to capture trickling bulk solids. After-
wards, the flow rate is no longer calculated; the counter stays at the level already achieved.
Tab. 37 : States and points in time in the flow chart

Appendix
Parameters Function
P06.01 Duration of the volumetric T1 start up period

P06.02 Continuation of totalizing after turning off T2 feeding (afterflow totalizer)
P04.01 Source of the on signal
P04.05 Source of the all-clear signal
P14.01 Scales signal output switched on
Tab. 38 : Relevant parameters
What to do if there is an alarm:

The feeder drive is switched off immediately if an alarm is triggered. The flow rate will continue to be record-
ed even past the time set in P06.02 Afterflow Totalizer.
Measurement and displays:
The measuring load will always be calculated and displayed. The flow rate will only be calculated with the
feeder switched on and during the Afterflow Totalizer (P06.02).
9.2 Measuring
Measuring the flow rate (measure)
Fig. 15: A simplified signal flow diagram
LC Load cell D Rotation point
Q The load on the load cell CW Calibration Weight
a The distance between the 'calibration weight' b The distance between the 'force application
and the 'fulcrum' load cell and the fulcrum'

Appendix
Ua The load cell output voltage aw[%] The load cell utilization in % of its rated ca-
pacity
Qm The measured load in kg Iu[kg/h] The measured flow rate in kg/h before linea-
rization and correction
LIN Lineariser I [kg/h] The measured flow rate
Q[kg] The measured load on the load cell CWT The CW: Span Calibration calibration pro-
gram
Parameter Name Meaning
P05.01 LC: Load Measurement Select the physical input channel

P05.02 LC Characteristic Value The transmission factor of the load cell according
to the data sheet
P05.05 LC Rated Capacity The total of the rated capacities of the load cells
used according to the data sheet
P05.06 Device Constant The transmission factor of the mass flow → force
according to the data sheet
P10.01 Range Correction Optional correction factor after a calibration
weight check
P10.02 Basic Tare Tare as the result of the TW: Tare calibration
program
P10.03 Tare Correction The zero setting results of the >0< Zero Set cali-
bration program
P10.06 Tare Correction Check Tare correction from the automatic check system
[➙ 40]
P10.07 Calibration Weight Effective calibration weight
= CW * a / b
P10.08 Material Correction Correction via material control [➙ 47] or automat-
ic control [➙ 40]
9.3 Flow rate regulation

A flow rate controller is only available when P03.01 is set to YES.
The flow rate is controlled via volumetric discharge performance of the feeder before the measuring unit.
This output is set by DISOCONT Tersus so that the measured mass flow equals the flow rate setpoint.
Different types of feeder are used. Two different controller models are available for this. The controller mo-
del is selected via P11.01.

Appendix
The control- P11.01 Controller magni- The feeder model

ler model tude
Constant Continuous 0 (4) ... 20 mA A continuously rotating feeder such as a helix or starwheel, ...
controller The feed gate with built-in pneumatic or electric position control
The parameter has no effect in the Flow Gate block
Step control- Stepping OPEN and CLOSE The feed gate driven by a motor with position feedback
ler contacts The parameters in the Flow Gate block configure the characteris-
tics
Tab. 40 : Controller models and how they are used
9.3.1 Constant controller

The following figure shows a simplified schematic depiction of the control circuit for operating a mass flow
metering unit with the DISOCONT Tersus.
Fig. 16: A simplified signal flow diagram

Appendix
PF Volumetric feeder Q[kg/h] The measured load on the load cell
I[kg/h] Actual flow rate P[kg/h] Flow rate setpoint
Xd[%] The deviation in percent of the nominal Event Event identification

flow rate (P03.02)
OFF Behavior when feeding is switched off K The value of the VHM input keyboard
V The value from serial fieldbus coupling A The value from the analog input
VOL Volumetric/gravimetric operational mode Measure Refer to Measuring the flow rate (measure)
switch [➙ 211] for signal processing
Parameter Name Meaning

P03.02 Nominal Flow Rate The nominal flow rate from the data sheet
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Select the input cable for the setpoint flow rate
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up The duration of start-up operations after feeding has been
switched on
P08.01 LC Filter The filter for the load cell signal
P11.02 P-Component KP The proportion of the PI controller
P11.03 I-Component TN PI controller readjusting time
P11.04 Lower Limit The lower limit of the controller magnitude
P11.05 Upper Limit The upper limit of controller magnitude dependant on the set-
point (see below for details)
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset Raising the controller magnitude
P11.07 Position at STOP The definition of the behavior of the controller magnitude when
feeding is switched off
P11.08 Bypass The setpoint-bypass constant
P11.09 Store The definition of the integral component's behavior when feed-
ing is switched off
P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord The time constant of the 1st setpoint filter
P11.11 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord The time constant of the 2nd setpoint filter
P11.17 Compensation Element Compensation for avoiding contouring errors
P11.12 KP Adaptation Controlling velocity depending upon the setpoint
P11.13 Setpoint Threshold The setpoint threshold below which the P11.12 is effective
PI controller with bypass details

The central control unit consists of a PI controller for the flow rate of the model
The standard PI controller is also equipped with a setpoint bypass (P11.08). The bypass quickly carries out
setpoint jumps even if the controller is set slowly. Beyond this, the bypass allows controlled (volumetric)
operation.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller through a reconstruction of the
controlled member (P11.10 and P11.11). The controller is also equipped with controller magnitude limitation

Appendix
(P11.04 and P11.05) dependant upon the setpoint. The controller is stopped and an event is identified
(message) when reaching the lower or upper controller magnitude limit.
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the
following diagram.
Parameter Special case

value
KP = 0 I-controller: TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants,

i.e., the larger value = the slower controller KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)
TN = 0 P-controller: I-portion will be deleted
KP=TN=0 Controller output = controller increase
Tab. 42 : Special cases for KP and TN parameters
Parameters Effect
P06.01 The duration of volumetric start-up operation once the scale has been switched on
Volumetric Start-Up in seconds
P11.09 NO: The I-proportion is not stored when switching off

Store YES: The I-proportion is stored when switched off and has an impact when starting
up
YES-A: The I-proportion is stored when switched off and has an impact when start-
ing up when feeding is not switched off by an alarm.
P11.08 One value is superimposed additively on the actuating variable, proportionally to the
Bypass preset setpoint. This parameter gives the bypass value for the nominal setpoint.
P11.10 The filters delay the setpoint for the controller while the bypass comes to the control-
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ler magnitude output without a delay.
This has the purpose of approximately adjusting the time characteristics of the con-
P11.11 trolled member to prevent the actual value from overshooting on setpoint jumps.
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord

Appendix
Parameters Effect
P11.17 This additional constant integral member in the control deviation branch can have
Compensation Element the following favorable effects:
Contouring errors brought about by monotonous variable malfunctions (such as
control measurement equipment).
Constant control deviations with actuators with a non-symmetric effect.
The compensation element
≠ only has an impact in gravimetric operation and
P11.17 parameters zero. The input and output are limited to ± 5 %.
P11.12 This parameter can be used to evaluate the proportional component of the controller
KP Adaptation depending upon the flow rate set value.
KP Adaptation = 1 : KP is independent on the setpoint
KP Adaptation = 0 : KP decreases in proportion to the setpoint
KP Adaptation = 2 : KP increases in proportion to the setpoint
P11.13 The upper limit for evaluating the control deviation by the setpoint as per P11.12
Setpoint Threshold
Tab. 43 : Set-up notes for parameters in the constant controller
Condition Characteristics
Change in the parameter The I component is not converted when parameters are changed which means that
values there might be jumps in the controller magnitude Y. If these jumps cannot be tolerated,
there should only be major changes in the (P11.08) bypass when feeding is switched
off.
Network connection The stored values in the I component and in the filters are set to zero.
Switch off feeding Stored components of the setpoint filter are set to zero. The value of the I component
is determined by P11.09.
Starting up feeding The feeder is switched on when all conditions are met.
The controller magnitude is set to the value of the setpoint bypass. The rise in P11.06
and the stored I component of the controller overlap one another consecutively as per
P11.09.
The setpoint filter starts working simultaneously from zero.
The flow rate controller works according to P06.01 in volumetric operation during the
start-up period. After the start-up period, the controller ts released and gravimetric
operation begins.
Standby The drive for protecting the motor is switched off if the internal controller magnitude
drops below the limit set in P07.02 longer than three seconds. The controller magni-
tude is set to the lower value corresponding to P11.06. It continues to report outwards
that feeding is in progress.
The controller does not function and the I component of the flow rate controller is de-
leted or stays stored depending upon P11.09.
Measurement remains active.
It switches to normal operation if the internal controller magnitude exceeds the limits
set in P07.02.
Gravimetric operating mode The actual flow rate value is set to the effective setpoint through the material feeder.
Volumetric operating mode Only the setpoint bypass and rise act as a controller magnitude. The feeder is con-
trolled proportional to the setpoint. The I component of the controller is deleted regard-
less of the P11.09 while the setpoint filters continue to run.

Appendix
Condition Characteristics
Volumetrically synchronous In contrast to volumetric operation, switching synchronously from gravimetric to volu-
operation type metric makes it possible to switch over from the gravimetric operating mode without a
bump by including the current controller output value.
Simulation The control circuit is closed internally in simulation operation. The measured values Q
and n are also simulated (Q=Qnominal, n = nominal speed).
The simulated value is shown as the flow rate. The controller magnitude Y is propor-
tional to the setpoint and is 10 mA specifying the nominal setpoint.
Operating modes, switching sources on/off and setpoint sources function as usual in
simulation operation.
The task: testing the plant, especially the control processes. Learning operation.
The characteristics in the The components stored in the controller are set to zero when selectively switching off
'Prefeeder – Stop' mode the feeder just as when switching off feeding. However, totalizing continues to functi-
on.
Tab. 44 : Characteristics in special operational states
Monitoring control deviation

The control deviation is displayed and monitored in gravimetric operation only.
The display, but not the monitoring system input, is filtered by parameter P08.05.
Event message 'P07.08' will be triggered if the value of the error signal Xd exceeds the limit value S1 for a
duration defined in parameter Event: Deviation. Monitoring will restart if the error signal falls below the thre-
shold during this time.
At the same time, the control deviation value is filtered (filter time in parameter P07.08) and the filter output
is monitored. Event 'Event: Deviation' will be identified if the filter output exceeds the threshold value S2.
Threshold values S1 and S2 can be adapted to the current feed rate setpoint by means of the following for-
mulas:
S1 = P07.09 * [P07.10 + (1 - P07.10) * Feed rate setpoint / P03.02]
S2 = P07.11 * [P07.10 + (1 - P07.10) * Feed rate setpoint / P03.02]
The following diagram illustrates the relationship using with examples for threshold value S1.
P Feed rate setpoint V Limit value S1 or S2

LIM Limit Value in P07.09 or. P07.11 F Influence Factor P07.10

Appendix
9.3.2 Step controller

The controller functions as a three-point switch to moving position-controlled flow gates OPEN and
CLOSED and feed gates, etc. The controller model is switched on via P11.01 = Stepping and is only availa-
ble for feeding systems (P03.01 = YES).
Fig. 17: The simplified signal flow diagram of the stepping controller

Appendix
Parameter Effect
P11.14 The proportional component (P component) of the stepping controller.

The reference quantity is the nominal flow rate in P03.02
P11.15 Readjusting time
This is the time when the same controller magnitude change is caused by the I component as by
the P component.
P11.16 The trigger threshold in % of P03.02
The trigger threshold should be greater than the smallest possible step of the actuator.
The feeder stands still if the control deviation is smaller than the trigger threshold.
P11.17 The time constant of the compensation element
The compensation element contains an additional integrator (refer to constant controller) to bal-
ance out contouring errors dependant upon bin levels. The compensation element only functions
in gravimetric operation.
The compensation element is ineffective at P11.17 = 0.
Tab. 45 : The control parameters for the step controller
Value Meaning
Network ON Delete all elements to be stored

(the controller and compensation integrator)
Scale OFF The 'feeder ON' contact is reset and all elements to be stored are
deleted.
Scales ON The scale begins to work until the elapse of the start-up period in
volumetric operation.
Afterwards, it switches over to gravimetric regulation.
Volumetric operation Switch M to 'vol/start-up'
The feeder is set to a position proportional to the setpoint. The
compensation integrator is deleted and becomes ineffective.
Gravimetric operation Switch M to 'grav.' (drawn position).
The actual flow rate value is set to the effective setpoint through the
position of the feeder.
The compensation integrator is active.
Tab. 46 : Switching and operational states

Appendix
The internal structure of the step controller
Fig. 18: The feed gate control logic
The EXTERNAL component is not a part of the DISOCONT Tersus. Instead, it is only a proposal for creat-
ing local switching for connecting to an FAE 8202 model power unit.
Drawing elements Meaning
Switch menu The operating elements of the control unit or in EasyServe

Min The limit switch for the MIN feeder position
Max The limit switch for the MAX feeder position
Tab. 47 : Some signals of the control logic
The 'Open', 'Stop' and 'Closed' switch positions are only available with manual control of the feeder.
The Min and Max limit switches keep the limit positions of the feeder from being overrun.

Appendix
9.4 Batch Operation Control

The following figure shows the batching operation process.
Fig. 19: Batching flow chart diagram
PB Batching setpoint in kg T3 The duration of the adaptation period

(P15.15 )
m The fed mass T4 The duration of dribble feed phase 2
(P15.17 )
T2 P06.02 Measure Recording the actual flow rate and calculat-
Afterflow Totalizer ing the totalizing counter
PR Effective flow rate setpoint Feed The switch-on command to the feeder's
discharge organ
Main_Spd The command for feeding in full feed Dbl_Spd The command for feeding in dribble speed
1
Dbl_Spd2 The command for feeding in dribble speed B_On The 'batch running' output signal
2
ON Output signal active OFF Output signal passive

Appendix
State Transitions During Feeding as per the Flow Chart Diagram

No. Transition in states
0 Start the batch by switching on the scales. The batch setpoint has to be entered first. The setpoint can no
longer be altered once the batch is running.
1 Interrupt operation by turning off the scales. The totalizing counter still measures for the time entered in T2 =
P06.02 Afterflow Totalizer.
2 Resume batch by turning on the scales. This can also be done during the Afterflow Totalizer.
3 The flow rate setpoint is reduced to zero (but only with controlling systems) and the P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed
and P15.10 DO: Full Feed signals swap levels.
The switching time is before the calculated batch end time by the period defined in P15.15 (batch setpoint
reached).
The characteristics of the flow rate setpoint (only on controlling systems):
▪ Case A: P15.03 = Ramp
– If the current setpoint is lower than P15.16, the setpoint will be continuously reduced to zero as per
the A1 process in the diagram.
– If the current setpoint is greater than P15.16, the setpoint will be suddenly switched to the value de-
fined by P15.16 and then continuously reduced to zero as per the process A2 in the diagram.
▪ Case B: P15.03 = Steps

The value will be reduced to the value set by P15.16 at the time defined by P15.15. The setpoint will be
reduced again to the value given by P15.18 (process A3 in the diagram) at the point in time given by
P15.17 before the end. The P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2 signal is also set.
4 A batch is ended if the setpoint minus the 'Correction Amount' defined in P15.04 has been reached or if the
effective setpoint in cases A1 and A2 becomes zero. In case B, a batch is ended at the latest after three times
the adaptation time (P15.15) has elapsed.
With a measuring scales, the dribble feed quantity (pre-contact) results from the adaptation time set multiplied
by the dribble feed starting value.
5 The flow of bulk solids is recorded for the time entered in T2 = P06.02. That also includes the remaining trickle
of bulk solids in the measured value.
A new batch can only be started after the afterflow time has elapsed.
Tab. 48 : Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder
Adaptation
With adaptation, a corrective quantity K is calculated from the error quantity (batch actual weight - weight
setpoint) after each completed batch and stored in the P15.04 parameter. This automatically shifts items 3
to 5 of the diagram with the next batch.
K(new) = K(old) + P15.05 * error
K(new) = new corrective quantity
Error = actual batch weight – batch setpoint
Errors greater than the batching tolerance set by P15.20 are restricted to the set tolerance value. Shortfalls
that are smaller than the smallest display digit are not corrected.
P15.05 acts as a filter parameter to ensure that P15.04 contains a mean for the bulk material overrun with.
Behavior if Alarm Triggered

If an alarm is triggered, the batch is interrupted as if feeding were switched off. The batch can be resumed
once the cause has been rectified and the event message acknowledged.

Appendix
Threshold values
The P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN event message is suppressed during the rundown time. This does
not apply to the digital output.
Feed controller in standby mode

The scales can enter standby mode during rundown time (P07.02). The corresponding message is sup-
pressed.
9.5 Local operation

For service work, it is often necessary to turn on specific drives individually and without interlocking with
other plant components. Service operation is not intended for running the feeder operationally.
WARNING
There is danger from moving machine parts and flowing bulk solids
Interlocking can be suspended with lowering equipment and a start up warning depending upon settings and
cabling. Special protective measures should be complied with in this operating mode!
It can either be operated in local operation with a VLG model control unit or a VMO model control unit (with
a display).
9.5.1 Controlling with VLG

The VLG control unit is switched on electrically between VCU and the drives. Drives can be switched on and
off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocking the operating mode).
Fig. 20: Local operation with VLG
You can find details on the design forms, connections and functionality of the VLG in the BV-H 2406 system
manual.
9.5.2 Controlling
Controlling with VMO
The VMO motor control unit communicates with the VCU through a serial interface (local bus). Drives can
be switched on and off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocked oper-

Appendix
ating mode) and the speed can be specified for controlled drives. You can find technical data and operating
instructions for the VMO in the BV-H2488 manual.
When using the VMO 20100, it continues to be electrically connected to the drives directly from the VCU.
The VMO acts as an input and operating unit in local operation.
Fig. 21: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100
As an alternative, the VMO control unit can also be equipped with its own interface and be switched be-
tween VCU and the drive.
Fig. 22: VMO 20101 with VCU
In this case, the VCU can operate the interface of the VMO in automatic operation. It is autonomously con-
troled via VMO in manual operation. In this case, the parameters have to be adjusted in the VMO for local
operation in a way that matches the parameters of the VCU.
In both cases, the logic is wired for local operation in signal engineering between the automatic control via
VCU and the software interface to the drives.

Appendix
Fig. 23: Inserted local operation logic
AUTO Control in automatic operation LOC Control in local operation

ACT Actuators: such as motors, valves and feed A Automatic Mode
gates, ...
L Local Operation
The local operation logic is correspondingly notified what output signal is responsible for a drive.
The appropriate parameters are in the Local Mode (Speed) block for drives controlled by velocity with an
external controller or drives controlled by position as well as for valves or in the Local Mode (Gate) block for
feed gates with the open and close drive circuit.
The LS signal source designates the logical signal issued at an output in normal (automatic) operation. Then
the local operation logic drives the appropriate output in local operation.
The monitoring inputs for local operation are taken in parallel from the inputs for automatic operation.

Appendix
9.5.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves
Fig. 24: Local operation logic for rotating drives
Signal Meaning An example of main drive and local control

block 1
Parameter Name Value
DO DOx: Start The digital output for starting the feeder drive that is P14.02 DO: Start DO-VCU1-
set as for normal operation per parameter. Prefeeder DO1
DO DOy: start(2) Doubling the signal for reporting 'Drive is running' P14.01 DO: Feeder DO-VCU1-
Started DO6

Appendix
LS DOx: Run Input for the switch-on command in automatic op- P35.02 ON in Remote LS-VCU1-
eration. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in auto- (Block 1) DO1
matic operation: Start.
This parameter links the local operation logic with
normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive
is supposed to be switched in local operation.
Enable jog The parameter that defines whether the drive can be P35.05 JOG enable YES
started for set-up mode even if a malfunction is (Block 1)
pending.
Loc Start Start command triggered by the start button of VMO Button on VMO
Local mode 'VMO is in Local Mode' signal. The conditions for The state in VMO
being able to switch VMO into local mode depend
on the configuration of VMO.
VMO exists The parameter that stipulates whether there is a P01.12 VMO20100- YES
VMO and if it is linked to the drive. P01.14 Unit 1 NO
P35.01 VMO20100- VMO1 motor
Unit 2 1
Motor Select
(Block 1)
VMO OK The 'Fault-Free Communication to the VMO' signal -
Enable Loc Start The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in P35.06 Release local
local operation Start (Block
1)
DIx: Error1 The drive's error signal. The drive cannot be started P35.07 DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1
DIx: Error1 locally if there is an error. P35.08 Error 1 (Block n/a
1)
DIx: Error1 P35.09 n/a
DI: External
Error 2 (Block
1)
DI: External
Error 3 (Block
1)
Loc Active Local operation is active. The signal may also switch -
the controller magnitude for controlled drives to local
input from VMO.
AO AOx The analog output for specifying the speed to the P12.13 AO: Motor AO-VCU1-
drive, set as for normal operation per parameter. Speed AO1
Control
LS AOx The input for specifying speed in automatic opera- P35.03 Controller LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto AO AOx in automatic Magnitude AO1
operation. (Block 1)
The parameter connects local operation logic to
normal operation logic, thus stipulating which con-
troller magnitude is assigned to the drive in local
operation.
LOC Speed Specifying the controller magnitude in local opera- VMO input
tion on the VMO

Appendix
9.5.2.2 The logic for position-

position-controlled feed gates
Fig. 25: The logic for position-controlled drives
Signal Meaning An example of feed gates and local control

block 1
Parameters Name Value
DO DOx: Open Digital output for opening the feed gate, set as for P34.01 S: DO Open DO-VCU1-
normal operation per parameter. Flow Gate DO1
DO DOx: Close Digital output for closing the feed gate, set as for nor- P34.02 S: DO Close DO-VCU1-
mal operation per parameter. Flow Gate DO2
LS DOx: Open The input for the Open command in automatic opera- P36.02 OPEN in LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic Remote DO1
operation: Start.
normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is
supposed to be switched in local operation.

Appendix
LS DOx: Close The input for the Open command in automatic opera- P36.04 CLOSE in LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic Remote DO2
operation: Start.
normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is
supposed to be switched in local operation.
Loc Open The command for opening the valve, triggered by the Button on VMO
button of VMO
Loc Close The command for closing the valve, triggered by the Button on VMO
button of VMO
Local Mode VMO is in Local Mode signal. The conditions for being The state in VMO
able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the
configuration of VMO.
VMO exists The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO P01.12 VMO20100- YES
and if it is linked to the drive. P01.14 Unit 1 NO
P35.01 VMO20100- VMO1 motor
Unit 2 1
Motor Select
(Block 1)
VMO OK The Fault-Free Communication to the VMO signal -
Enable Loc The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in P35.06 Release local
Start local operation Start (Block
1)
DIx: Error1 The drive's error signal The drive cannot be started P35.07 DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1
DIx: Error1 locally if there is an error. P35.08 Error 1 (Block n/a
1)
DIx: Error1 P35.09 n/a
DI: External
Error 2 (Block
1)
DI: External
Error 3 (Block
1)
Loc Active Local operation is active -

Appendix
9.6 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit
Fig. 26: Bin limit values
The normal scales applies in normal operation. The fill level is regulated by the metering hopper. In intermit-
tent operation the metering hopper is activated when the fill level F-Min is underrun and is deactivated as
soon as the F-Max level is exceeded. If the metering hopper is continuously active (P23.01 = YES), the fill
level is regulated to the fill level setpoint F-Set by means of the changes in the metering hopper flow rate.
The check measurement takes over the fill regulation when a check is started. Wherever necessary, it is
filled until there are sufficient bulk solids in the bin (fill level > C-Check + C-Min). The check starts when the
fill level falls below F-Max and is stopped when the fill level falls below C-Min.

Appendix
9.7 Continuous bin fill level control
Fig. 27: VMC bin fill level controller
The fill level controller only works for the first Bin Weigher, although not for any Second Bin Weigher availa-
ble.

Appendix
Setup Notes
P23.12 can be determined in a stationary state once the transient oscillations have subsided. In this state,
the value is calculated as follows:
P23.12 = (yB - P23.14 ) × P03.02 / flow rate setpoint
We recommend calling up the Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation [➙ 39] adjustment program for the
control parameter after entering input the P23.07 and P23.12 parameters.

Appendix
9.8 Bin fill level regulation via feed gate
Fig. 28: Step controller for the bin fill level

Appendix
Abbreviation Meaning
B-S: Xd Service value: the control deviation for the position controller
B: Position Service value: the position of the feed gate
a) P The flow rate setpoint (P) with feeding systems
b) I The actual flow rate (I) with measuring systems
B: Xd Service value: the control deviation for the fill level controller
StepCTRL Step controller
PosCTRL The position controller for the feed gate
PowerCTRL The power control for the feeder
Conti_M Continuous measurement of the flow rate
MIN The limit switch of the minimum position
MAX The limit switch of the maximum position
Tab. 49 : The meaning of the abbreviations in the block diagram

Appendix
9.9 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)
Fig. 29: Flow chart control measurement

Appendix
9.10 Adjusting linearization

The correlation between the actual and the measured flow rate may depart from the ideal straight lines for
differing flow rates. Some reasons might be material build-up on the deflection chute, a flow profile indepen-
dant of the flow of bulk solids or a flow velocity dependant upon the flow of bulk solids.
Please comply with the position of the linearizer in the signal branch as per the figure in Block Diagram:
Measuring the Flow Rate [➙ 211] when adjusting linearization. It is necessary to set make control mea-
surements with bulk solids (Control with Material [➙ 47]; Automatic Control Check Systems (KME) [➙ 40])
for setting the linearization points.
Before adjusting linearization, it is necessary to calibrate the measuring equipment with linearization
(P33.01 = NO) switched off. Then call up the tare function without bulk solids after keying in the relevant
parameters. Finally, it is necessary to make an initial measurement with bulk solids at the highest possible
flow rate to check and readjust the proportionality factor P10.01 Range Correction between the measured
value and flow rate wherever necessary.
Linearization should be carried out at k (k < 5) measuring points with differing flow rates I(k) in the flow rate
zone relevant to production. We recommend distributing the points I(k) with equal spaces over the relevant
zone. There is an additional point at flow rate = zero that is automatically adjusted by taring without a flow of
bulk solids. The curve is continued at a constant gradient above the highest point. This is why the two high-
est points should be sufficiently far apart from another to correctly define the gradient.
Furthermore, the points in both axes have to be rising monotonically.
Fig. 30: Linearization characteristic curve
Ideal: Straight course of the correlation between the measured value and actual flow rate
Real: The calculated non-linear course of the real characteristic curve
The figure shows the selected measuring points of the flow rate in the horizontal axis. The S(k) values to be
keyed into the parameters are as follows:
S(k) = I(k) / (P03.02 * P10.01) * 100 % ; k = 1, 2, 3, 4
The value S(k) can be read out during the measurement from the Unlin. Flow Rate service value. If the
measurement takes place in the operation controlled by the flow rate, I(k) corresponds to the flow rate set-
point used.
The value R(k,n+1) to be adjusted in the parameters of the vertical axis after making the measurement re-
sults from the value of the corresponding parameter R(k,n) that is active during the measurement, the value

Appendix
ms of the conveyed quantity ascertained on a sufficiently precise static scale and the meter progress mc of
the Coriolis measuring unit:
R(n+1) = R(n) * ms/mc
The flow rate naturally deviates from the flow rate I(k) in the middle of the measurement at the start and end
of the measurement. To ensure that these effects have the smallest possible impact on parameter adjust-
ment, the start phase should be as brief as possible until reaching the flow rate I(k) and the take-off phase
should be as brief as possible in relation to the entire duration of the measurement. This can be supported
with a quick controller adjustment with systems controlled by flow rate. If the start- and take-off phase can-
not be selected to be brief in relation to the overall duration, all linearization points should be preset and
then checked and recalibrated. Suitable controller adjustment should guarantee a flow rate that is as con-
stant as possible during the measurement.
We recommend depicting the actual values of linearization for the plausibility control graphically.
9.11 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking'
Fig. 31: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages
Explanations:
All signal levels can be inverted by setting the associated source parameter (also refer to Configuring the
Interfaces [➙ 52]). The factory setting is given in the diagram.
▪
LOW: closed contact in standby, i.e. power is on. The contact is open if the signal is active (functions as
opener).
▪
HIGH: open contact in standby, i.e. power is not on. The contact is closed if the signal is active (func-
tions as closer).

Appendix
E: event message
DI: digital input
DO: digital output
Legend Parameter Signal Name
Alarm All event messages of event class ALARM

DI E 1 P28.06 DI: Event Electricity 1
DI EE 1 P13.02 DI: External Event 1
DI M 1 P28.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1
DO E P28.11 DO: Event Electricity
DO M P28.09 DO: Event Mechanics
DO MT 1 P28.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1
DO MT 2 P28.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2
DO R P28.16 DO: Ready
DO RS P28.18 DO: Ready for Start
IL-2 P28.10 Event: Mechanics
IL-3 P28.12 Event: Electricity
IL-4 P28.15 Event: Mechatronics
IL-5 P28.17 Event: Not Ready
IL-6 P28.19 Event: Not Ready for Start
Int. alarm Internal alarm resulting from event messages CA01, CA02,
WM01, WM02, WM03, WM04
NO S No service mode: no keyboard mode, no local mode,
No simulation mode
Release P04.05 Source Run Enable
SC-5 P13.01 Event: External Event 1
SC-6 P13.03 Event: External Event 2
SC-11 P13.06 DI: External Event 3
SC-12 P13.08 DI: External Event 4
NOTE: When an input source parameter accepts the value n/a, the signal is internally assumed to
be True.

Appendix
9.12 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs
It is usual for some signals to be read in through sensors with strain gauges (DMS) such as weight, force or
pressure signals. In special cases, these signals are recorded with other types of sensors or reshaped ex-
ternally so that they are available in the form of standard signals (such as 4 … 20 mA). DISOCONT Tersus
provides the option of reading in some sources of input signals via standard signals. The standard signal is
read in through an analog VAI 20100 interface and reshaped to make it correspond to the signal of a DMS
sensor. The remaining signal processing is identical for the DMS signal and standard signal.
Some measuring signals can also be read in by fieldbus to prevent faults on the transmission path. These
are also processed like DMS signals after appropriate conversion.
Fig. 32: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin
LC DMS load cell output voltage 0 … 20 mA Input current from the external sensor
FB:kg The weight value in kg transmitted [mV/V] A signal with the dimension mV/V
from the fieldbus
Adjust Handing over the signal to the calibra- LC [mV/V] The service value of the load with the mV/V
tion programs dimension
LC_0 The rated load cell load in P22.04 LC [%] The service value of the load in percent of
LC_0
X0 Offset analog input in P22.30 Xn Range characteristic value in P22.31
V Transmission factor of the load cell in x, y Input and output values of the calculating
P22.03 blocks

Appendix
Error Error signal if the physical signal is out Source Selecting the source for the signal in P22.02
of range
Corr Multiplicative correction of the trans- Tare Zero signal in P22.25 such as determined by
mission factor in P22.24 the calibration program
L The load for further use of the applica-

tion software
This figure uses recording the weight of an additional bin as an example of the form the signals of sources
other than DMS load cells are processed in. The calibration programs, service displays and parameters for
tare and correcting sensitivity remain in manual override, even though they indicate some values such as for
the DMS load cells. The figure applies accordingly to other signals such as force or pressure. The corres-
ponding parameters are in the group that also contains the parameter for selecting the signal source.
NOTE: Please bear the fact in mind that the value resolution of a value read in through the stan-
dard signal is reduced by the resolution of the external transmitter and the VAI 20100 inter-
face assembly in relation to the input for DMS via interface VME0120 (VME0120: 24 bits
and VAI 20100: 16 bits). In addition, there can also be a temporal offset of the signal due to
scanning.
There might be additional errors in particular when forming the difference of signals (such
as differentiating) or a compensator (such as pressure compensation).
9.13 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, you can expand its functionality for additional simple jobs by linking signals and using func-
tion blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. Any configuration created can
be loaded into or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being
loaded.
All signals that can are available via fieldbus can be used as input signals for the function blocks. The output
signals are integrated into the standard signal processing of DISOCONT Tersus with the parameters of the
FCB analog outputs and FCB digital outputs groups.
A loaded and active link is shown on the operator panel with the information for the program by pressing the
Help button. The Empty link designates the factory default without added links.

Appendix
Fig. 33: Example of a function block link
In this example, a binary input signal (for instance, an input contact of DISOCONT Tersus) is being read in
through the GP-Din 1 input block and the Delay 1 delay while an inverter is given to the And1-4 AND gate.
The other inputs are linked with the constant 1 and a Cycle 1 frequency generator. This provides the output
with a cyclical signal when the waiting period has elapsed after setting the input. The output of the AND gate
is linked to an output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The physical output requires connecting
the signal with a digital output through P30.01 FCB_DO 01.
9.13.1 Handling the Function Blocks

Condition: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN (VPL 20430) must be installed on the
PC.
Function blocks can be edited and linked in EasyServe Expert Mode only.
For this DISOPLAN must be started with administrator rights from EasyServe as follows:
▪
Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Blocks', or
▪
Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Variants/parameters'
Supplementary documentation:
▪
BV-H2185 EasyServe operating manual
▪
BV-H2461 DISOPLAN operating manual
A detailed description of the function block editor can be found in a separate manual (BV-
H2317)
CAUTION: Creating and modifying links is reserved solely to Schenck Process person-
nel.

Appendix
Configurations can be read out of and loaded into the control. They can be filed on the hard disk of PCs and
called up from there. Links have to be given a name. The empty link (as a factory default) has the name
Empty and should not be used for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of function when exchanging the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded, it will be necessary to store it
separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is exchanged, both the parameters
and the function block link have to be loaded separately to restore full func-
tionality. Alternatively, you can use the additionally installed tool
DISOPLAN (that contains both the parameters and the function block links)
to make a complete backup. However, this backup can then no longer be
used for setting a more recent version of the program in the scale.
It is not necessary with a system with the Empty link (refer to Cleaning the Screen and Information [➙ 35])
to reload the link after exchanging the VCU since there is no expansion to the functions from the function
blocks.
Loading the function software or loading default settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have
any impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is retained. Any
loaded link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be
overwritten with a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scales operation as long as the outputs for the link are not
coupled to the scales software with the corresponding parameters P29.01 to P30.20.
9.13.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 34: Binary function blocks

Appendix
No. Type quantity Parameter Function
1 Binary input 20 Process variable as per the de- Connection of the function block logic
'GP-DIn' scription of the fieldbus interface to the function of the standard pro-
gram
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Con-
'GP-Dout' nect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Clock generator 2 Period duration Signal generator for a periodic signal.
'Cycle'
4 'Bin. 0' 1 - Encoder for the binary constants 1 =
'Bin. 1' 1 True and 0 = False
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the pulse The timer has three outputs that
'Timer' supply an pulse of 0.1 seconds dura-
tion at the time set.
6 AND 6 - AND link between two input signals
'And'
AND 4 - AND link between four input signals
'And 4'
7 OR 6 - OR link between two input signals
'Or'
OR 8 - OR link between four input signals
'Or 4'
8 Negation 10 - Inverts the signal
'Not'
9 Retardation 8 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the speci-
'Delay' fied time
Tab. 50 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
9.13.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals

Analog signals can be processed with the following function block.

Appendix
Fig. 35: Analog function blocks
1 Analog input 20 Process variable as per Input for a variable with a continuous value.
'GP-AIn' the description of the
fieldbus interface
2 Analog output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connecting via
'GP-Aout' parameters in the FCB analog outputs block. Only 5
FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs.
All outputs are available as measured values in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower com- Supplies the 'True' value if the input signal lies out-
'Comparator' parative value side of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower thre- Limits the input signal and becomes True when the
shold value limiter arises.
5 Multiplier 5 - Supplies the product of the input values at the out-
'Multiplier' put.
6 Memory 2 - The input value at MemInp is tied to Acquire with

'Memory' the increasing slope. It is available at the output. At
the same time, the Hold output indicates that a
value has been stored. The memory can be cleared
with Reset.
7 Addition 5 - Makes the sum of the input values available at the
'Add' output.
8 Subtraction 5 - Makes the difference of the input values available at

'Subtract' the output

Appendix

9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the counted input impulses at the output
'Counter'
10 Switch 1 - Switches one of the three inputs to the output
'analog switch'
11 Multiplication 20 Dividend Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor
'Factor' Divisor
12 Constant 5 The value of the con- Supplies the numerical value at the output
'Constant' stants
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor
9.14 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters

DISOCONT Tersus has three internal totalizing integrators (=totalizing counters). The results of the counters
can be transferred to an external counter by means of one of the following ways:
▪
Via the electronic impulse output (open collector) DO8 of the VCU at a frequency < 10 Hz for external
electronic counters. This is the most preferable method.
▪
Via a DO1-DO7 of the VCU. The minimum impulse length is 1 s. The life cycle of the output relay is
guaranteed for 20 million switches only.
Of course, the counter readings can be read more simply via the fieldbus or in the web server.
The relevant parameters are:
P03.07 Pulse Length Total
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter
P03.09 Totalizer Increment
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter P03.07 Pulse Length Total
0 ... 9 ms 10 ms … 1 s >1s
DO8 No pulse 10 ms … 1 s >1s
DO1 … DO7 No pulse 1s >1s
Tab. 51 : Long counting pulse
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Counting pulse weight determined by:

0 kg No pulse
> 0 kg P03.09 Totalizer Increment
Tab. 52 : Counting pulse weight

Appendix
9.15 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation

Most of the function errors are indicated by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating vol-
tage supply to the load cells.
A test connector can narrow down any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
Fig. 36: Test Connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus instead of the load
cell cable.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electron-
ics. It must have the following value: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V ± 3 %.
Note: The raw measured data can be calculated according to the formula: raw measured data ~ 500 *
R2 / R1 [mV/V] if other resistance values should be used in the test connector
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the way the scale's rated data are set.

Index
Index
2. Password ..................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................................... 52
About This Manual ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absolute Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 151
Accept Correction ........................................................................................................................................................... 147
Access Rights Limitation FB........................................................................................................................................... 123
Access Rights Limitation HMI........................................................................................................................................... 79
Access to calibration functions ......................................................................................................................................... 31
Access to Special Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 22
Accessing the Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 32
Acknowledging Event Messages...................................................................................................................................... 24
Adaptation Factor ........................................................................................................................................................... 113
Adaptation Mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 112
Adaptation Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 114
Adaption Start Value ...................................................................................................................................................... 114
Additional Bin Weighers ................................................................................................................................................... 10
additional containers ........................................................................................................................................................ 10
Additional device ............................................................................................................................................ 159, 160, 161
Address .................................................................................................................................................................. 121, 122
Adjusting linearization .................................................................................................................................................... 236
Adjusting the flow rate regulation ..................................................................................................................................... 45
Afterflow Totalizer ............................................................................................................................................................ 89
AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................................. 157
AI Offset ........................................................................................................................................................................ 179
AI Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................................. 143
AI Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................... 179
AI Position Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................................. 142
AI Range ....................................................................................................................................................................... 179
AI Range (B) ................................................................................................................................................................. 143
Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................................ 76
Analog Channel A11 ........................................................................................................................................................ 76
Analog Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 102
Analog Setpoint Relat..................................................................................................................................................... 114
AO Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 103
AO Bin Load .................................................................................................................................................................. 134
AO Check Measurement Result .................................................................................................................................... 154
AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level ............................................................................................................................... 137
AO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 104
AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................ 158
AO Flow Rate Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 159
AO Flow Rate Range .................................................................................................................................................... 159
AO Load ........................................................................................................................................................................ 104
AO Motor Speed Control ............................................................................................................................................... 105
AO Offset .............................................................................................................................................................. 134, 179
AO Offset (B)................................................................................................................................................................. 143
AO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 129
AO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 129
AO Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 179
AO Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................ 143
AO Range ............................................................................................................................................................. 134, 179
AO Range (B)................................................................................................................................................................ 143
AO Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................ 209
Assembling the Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................ 45
Authorization for Control Commands ............................................................................................................................... 21
Auto Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 146
Auto Zero Active ............................................................................................................................................................. 159
Auto Zero Limit ............................................................................................................................................................... 160
Automatic control ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
Automatic control measurement unit (KME) ..................................................................................................................... 40
Basic Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 22
Basic Tare ........................................................................................................................................................................ 96
Batch Automatic Record................................................................................................................................................. 113

Index
Batch behaviour after power down ................................................................................................................................. 116

Batch control .................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................................................. 221
Batch Setpoint Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 116
Batch Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 114
Batch Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................... 114
Batch Setpoint Source.................................................................................................................................................... 112
Batch Tolerance ............................................................................................................................................................. 115
Batching ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................ 121, 122
Baud Rate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Behavior after Connecting the Power ............................................................................................................................... 11
Bin Controller ON ........................................................................................................................................................... 137
Bin fill level regulation via feed gate ............................................................................................................................... 233
Bin Level analog Input Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 136
Bin Level analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................................ 136
Bin Level Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 137
Bin Level MAX................................................................................................................................................................ 133
Bin Level MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 133
Bin Setpoint source ........................................................................................................................................................ 140
Bin Weigher.................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Bin Weigher Active ......................................................................................................................................................... 129
Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ................................................................................................................................ 28
Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ....................................................................................................................................... 230
Bin weight control ............................................................................................................................................................. 38
Bipolar Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 131
Bypass ................................................................................................................................................................... 100, 139
Bypass D Portion ........................................................................................................................................................... 139
Byte Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................... 120
CA01 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 193
CA03 Event Error LC Input (Bin) .................................................................................................................................. 194
CA05 Event Linearization Error .................................................................................................................................... 194
CA06 Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................ 194
Calibrating bin weighing ................................................................................................................................................... 47
Calibrating the Touchscreen ............................................................................................................................................ 35
Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 193
Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................... 96
Calibration programs ........................................................................................................................................................ 36
Calibration Time ............................................................................................................................................................... 97
Calibration Weight .................................................................................................................................................... 97, 135
CH02 Event Minimum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................. 194
CH03 Event Maximum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................ 195
CH04 Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 195
CH05 Event Relative Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 195
CH06 Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................... 196
CH07 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 196
CH08 Event Feeder Not Stopped ................................................................................................................................. 196
CH09 Event No Check Release ................................................................................................................................... 196
CH10 Event Prepare Check Measurement .................................................................................................................. 196
CH11 Event Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................. 197
CH12 Event Check Gate Error ..................................................................................................................................... 197
CH13 Event Bin Error ................................................................................................................................................... 197
Check Gate Feedback.................................................................................................................................................... 154
Check Gate Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 155
Check in Keyboard Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 120
Check Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 194
Check Quantity............................................................................................................................................................... 148
Check Start Span ........................................................................................................................................................... 147
Check Start Tare ............................................................................................................................................................ 147
Check System ................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Check with bulk solids ...................................................................................................................................................... 47
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation...................................................................................................... 246
Cleaning and Testing the Display..................................................................................................................................... 28
Cleaning the Screen and Information ............................................................................................................................... 35

Index
CLOSE in Remote .......................................................................................................................................................... 191

CO01 Event Controller Limited ..................................................................................................................................... 197
CO02 Event MIN Flow Gate ......................................................................................................................................... 198
CO03 Event MAX Flow Gate........................................................................................................................................ 198
CO04 Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 198
CO06 Event MAX Flow Gate (B) .................................................................................................................................. 198
CO10 Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................... 199
Command and Edit Keys.................................................................................................................................................. 19
Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................ 117
Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................ 118
Compatibility DISOCONT Master ................................................................................................................................... 120
Compensation Element .................................................................................................................................................. 102
Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 121
Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................................................................................. 175
Configuring Event Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 54
Configuring the Communication Path (Com) .................................................................................................................... 34
Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 52
Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ............................................................................................................................. 32
Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ............................................................................... 12
Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 13
Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 15
Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ................................................................................................................................ 35
Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 12, 14
Connection via Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................... 13
Connection via Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................... 12
Connection via RS232...................................................................................................................................................... 14
Connection via RS485...................................................................................................................................................... 13
Connection via WLAN ...................................................................................................................................................... 14
Constant controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 213
Continuous bin fill level control ....................................................................................................................................... 231
Control.............................................................................................................................................................................. 83
Control Level MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 132
Control Level MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 132
Control operating modes .................................................................................................................................................... 9
Control Sources ............................................................................................................................................................... 86
Controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 197
Controller in OFF-Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 135
Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ....................................................................................................................................... 181
Controller Magnitude Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 99, 139
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) ............................................................................................................................ 182
Controller Type................................................................................................................................................................. 98
Controlling with VLG ...................................................................................................................................................... 223
Controlling with VMO...................................................................................................................................................... 223
Correction Amount ......................................................................................................................................................... 113
Correction Evaluation ..................................................................................................................................................... 153
Correction Speed ........................................................................................................................................................... 153
Counter 1 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 84
Counter 2 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Counter 3 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Cycle Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Cyclic Auto Start............................................................................................................................................................. 146
D Filter TD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 138
D Portion TV................................................................................................................................................................... 138
Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 173
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ..................................................................................................................... 6
Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 149
Data Format ................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Data Log ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................................................ 83

Index
Data Log Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 174

Data Log Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 175
Data Log Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 174
Data Log Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 174
Data Log Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 174
Data Log Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 174
Data Log Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 174
Data Log Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 175
Data Log Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 175
Data Log Value 9 ........................................................................................................................................................... 175
Data Logging .................................................................................................................................................................. 173
Dead Band Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 140
Dead Band Factor .......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Dead Time Active ........................................................................................................................................................... 161
Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................................ 138
Detail Selection ................................................................................................................................................................ 19
Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ....................................................................................................... 235
Deviation abs. max........................................................................................................................................................... 92
Deviation Offset.............................................................................................................................................................. 104
Deviation Range............................................................................................................................................................. 105
Device Constant ............................................................................................................................................................... 89
DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................ 108
DI Batch Terminate ....................................................................................................................................................... 113
DI Bin Load Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
DI Event Electricity 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 164
DI Event Mechanics 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 163
DI External Error 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 192
DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................................... 182
DI External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 105
DI Init. Controller ........................................................................................................................................................... 140
DI Limit Switch CLOSE ................................................................................................................................................. 191
DI Limit Switch OPEN ................................................................................................................................................... 191
DI Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 109
DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1).......................................................................................................................................... 183
DI Reset Totalizer 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 109

Index
DI Reset Totalizer 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 109

DI Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 109
DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................................. 109
Dialog Behaviour .............................................................................................................................................................. 78
Digital Inputs .................................................................................................................................................................. 105
Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................ 110
Display and Operation Fields ........................................................................................................................................... 18
Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 132
Display Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 132
Display Parameter Alterations .......................................................................................................................................... 29
Display Stored Counter Readings .................................................................................................................................... 28
Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ........................................................................................................................ 28
Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. .............................................................................................................. 28
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 111
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 111
DO Agitator ON ............................................................................................................................................................. 161
DO ALARM ................................................................................................................................................................... 110
DO Batch Running ........................................................................................................................................................ 113
DO Bin Filling ................................................................................................................................................................ 133
DO Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
DO Bin Level MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
DO Check Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 154
DO Check Measurement Active .................................................................................................................................... 150
DO Control Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 149
DO Correction Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 156
DO Dead Time Active.................................................................................................................................................... 163
DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 111
DO Dribble Feed ........................................................................................................................................................... 114
DO Dribble Feed 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 115
DO Event Electricity ...................................................................................................................................................... 165
DO Event Mechanics..................................................................................................................................................... 164
DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 165
DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 165
DO Feeder ON .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
DO Feeder Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 110
DO Full Feed ................................................................................................................................................................. 114
DO Keyboard Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 111
DO Moisture active ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
DO Moisture MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO ON/OFF Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 163
DO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 127
DO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO PLC 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO PLC 4 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO PLC 5 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO PLC 6 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO PLC 7 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO PLC 8 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO Pulse Counter ........................................................................................................................................................... 86
DO Ready ..................................................................................................................................................................... 165
DO Ready for Start........................................................................................................................................................ 166
DO Setpoint Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 163
DO Start Prefeeder ....................................................................................................................................................... 110
DO Volumetric Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
DO WARNING .............................................................................................................................................................. 111
DO Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................................. 151
Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Electrical System............................................................................................................................................................ 199
Emergency Setpoint ......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Entering Basic parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 45
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Event Absolute Span Correction Error .................................................................................................................. 153, 196
Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 152, 195
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX .................................................................................................................................. 96, 203
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................... 95, 205

Index
Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 120, 208

Event Analog Input < Offset .................................................................................................................................... 94, 200
Event Batch setpoint Limit ..................................................................................................................................... 116, 203
Event Bin Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 156, 197
Event Bin Level MAX............................................................................................................................................. 134, 204
Event Bin Level MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 133, 205
Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 136, 198
Event Check Gate Error ........................................................................................................................................ 155, 197
Event Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................... 80, 207
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ................................................................................................................ 77, 207
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ................................................................................................................ 77, 207
Event Communication VHM serial ........................................................................................................................... 81, 207
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1................................................................................................................ 78, 208
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................ 78, 208
Event Controller Limited .......................................................................................................................................... 93, 197
Event Cyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 119, 208
Event Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................... 93, 204
Event Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 165, 201
Event Error LC Input ............................................................................................................................................... 90, 193
Event Error LC Input (Bin) ..................................................................................................................................... 131, 194
Event Expect Acceptance ..................................................................................................................................... 151, 197
Event External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 105, 206
Event FCB-Error.................................................................................................................................................... 170, 202
Event Feeder Not Stopped .................................................................................................................................... 150, 196
Event LC Input < MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 90, 205
Event LC Input > MAX............................................................................................................................. 91, 131, 203, 204
Event Linearization Error ....................................................................................................................................... 178, 194
Event Maint. Electric.............................................................................................................................................. 117, 206
Event Maint.Feeder Run ....................................................................................................................................... 117, 206
Event MAX Flow Gate ........................................................................................................................................... 180, 198
Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ..................................................................................................................................... 144, 198
Event Maximum Fill Weight ................................................................................................................................... 149, 195
Event Mechanics ................................................................................................................................................... 165, 201
Event Mechatronics ............................................................................................................................................... 165, 201
Event Memory ......................................................................................................................................................... 93, 206
Event MIN Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 180, 198
Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ...................................................................................................................................... 144, 199
Event Minimum Fill Weight .................................................................................................................................... 149, 194
Event Moisture MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 158, 202
Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 107, 199
Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 110, 201
Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 110, 201
Event No Check Release ...................................................................................................................................... 147, 196
Event Not Ready ................................................................................................................................................... 166, 201
Event Not Ready for Start ..................................................................................................................................... 166, 202
Event Out of Tolerance ......................................................................................................................................... 115, 202
Event Power Failure ................................................................................................................................................ 91, 199
Event Prepare Check Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 150, 196
Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 153, 196
Event Relative Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 152, 195
Event Run Disabled ................................................................................................................................................ 87, 201
Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................ 91, 205
Event Stand-By ....................................................................................................................................................... 90, 205
Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................... 160, 194
Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................ 193
Event Group: Check Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 194

Index
Event Group: Controller.................................................................................................................................................. 197

Event Group: Electrical System ...................................................................................................................................... 199
Event Group: Interlock.................................................................................................................................................... 201
Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................ 202
Event Group: MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Event Group: MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 205
Event Group: System Message ...................................................................................................................................... 206
Event messages ............................................................................................................................................................... 18
Event Messages ............................................................................................................................................................. 193
Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................ 193
Exit Scale ......................................................................................................................................................................... 83
External Control Type....................................................................................................................................................... 43
Factor Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................... 92
FCB analog outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 166
FCB digital outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 170
FCB Variant.................................................................................................................................................................... 170
FCB_AO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 166
FCB_AO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 167
FCB_AO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 167
FCB_AO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 168
FCB_AO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 169
FCB_DO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 170
FCB_DO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 06 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 07 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 08 .................................................................................................................................................................... 171
FCB_DO 09 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 10 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 11 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 12 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 13 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 14 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 15 .................................................................................................................................................................... 172
FCB_DO 16 .................................................................................................................................................................... 173
FCB_DO 17 .................................................................................................................................................................... 173
FCB_DO 18 .................................................................................................................................................................... 173
FCB_DO 19 .................................................................................................................................................................... 173
FCB_DO 20 .................................................................................................................................................................... 173
Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
Feeder control .................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Feeder Definition .............................................................................................................................................................. 83
Feeder Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................ 89
Feeder Start ..................................................................................................................................................................... 86
Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................................. 150
Feedrate Setpoint............................................................................................................................................................. 86
Fig. 01: The MULTISTREAM measuring principle ............................................................................................................. 9
Fig. 02: Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................... 10
Fig. 03: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display ............................................................................................... 17
Fig. 04: Lines configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 26
Fig. 05: Selection dialog for process values ..................................................................................................................... 27
Fig. 06: Single Unit KME Model ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Fig. 07: Separated Units Control Type ............................................................................................................................. 42
Fig. 08: Filling System KME Type .................................................................................................................................... 42
Fig. 09: External KME Type ............................................................................................................................................. 43
Fig. 10: Regulating the feeder .......................................................................................................................................... 46
Fig. 11: Arrangement for verification with bulk material .................................................................................................... 47
Fig. 12: Parameter sets .................................................................................................................................................... 51
Fig. 13: Setpoint and switch-on sources......................................................................................................................... 209
Fig. 14: The start and stop sequence ............................................................................................................................. 210
Fig. 15: A simplified signal flow diagram ........................................................................................................................ 211
Fig. 16: A simplified signal flow diagram ........................................................................................................................ 213
Fig. 17: The simplified signal flow diagram of the stepping controller ............................................................................ 218

Index
Fig. 18: The feed gate control logic ................................................................................................................................ 220

Fig. 19: Batching flow chart diagram .............................................................................................................................. 221
Fig. 20: Local operation with VLG .................................................................................................................................. 223
Fig. 21: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100 ............................................................................................................................ 224
Fig. 22: VMO 20101 with VCU ....................................................................................................................................... 224
Fig. 23: Inserted local operation logic ............................................................................................................................. 225
Fig. 24: Local operation logic for rotating drives ............................................................................................................. 226
Fig. 25: The logic for position-controlled drives .............................................................................................................. 228
Fig. 26: Bin limit values .................................................................................................................................................. 230
Fig. 27: VMC bin fill level controller ................................................................................................................................ 231
Fig. 28: Step controller for the bin fill level...................................................................................................................... 233
Fig. 29: Flow chart control measurement ....................................................................................................................... 235
Fig. 30: Linearization characteristic curve ...................................................................................................................... 236
Fig. 31: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages ................................................................. 237
Fig. 32: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin .................................................... 239
Fig. 33: Example of a function block link ........................................................................................................................ 241
Fig. 34: Binary function blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 242
Fig. 35: Analog function blocks ...................................................................................................................................... 244
Fig. 36: Test Connector .................................................................................................................................................. 246
Filling System Control Type ............................................................................................................................................. 42
Filling Type ..................................................................................................................................................................... 137
Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................... 94
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................................ 95
Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Filter Load ....................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Finish Check Measurement............................................................................................................................................ 148
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering........................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 124
FLOAT-Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 122
Flow Gate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 178
Flow Rate Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 140
Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................ 103
Flow Rate Range ........................................................................................................................................................... 104
Flow rate regulation ........................................................................................................................................................ 212
Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................................ 84
Flowthrough measurement zero setting ........................................................................................................................... 36
Format Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................ 243
Function Blocks for Binary Signals ................................................................................................................................. 242
Gateway ......................................................................................................................................................................... 127
General Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Gravimetric Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
Handling the Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 241
Hardware Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 203
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................... 203
HI05 Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 204
HI10 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 204
HI11 Event Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 204
HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................................. 175
HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................................. 175
HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
Hourly Total Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
I-Component TN....................................................................................................................................................... 98, 138
ID Preset Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
ID Preset Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
ID Preset Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
ID Preset Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124

Index
ID Preset Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124

ID Preset Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
ID Preset Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
ID Preset Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 125
ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
ID Read Value 11 ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
ID Read Value 12 ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
ID Read Value 13 ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
ID Read Value 14 ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
ID Read Value 15 ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
ID Read Value 16 ........................................................................................................................................................... 127
ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................. 126
ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................................. 126
IL01 Event Run Disabled.............................................................................................................................................. 201
IL02 Event Mechanics .................................................................................................................................................. 201
IL03 Event Electricity .................................................................................................................................................... 201
IL04 Event Mechatronics .............................................................................................................................................. 201
IL05 Event Not Ready .................................................................................................................................................. 201
IL06 Event Not Ready for Start .................................................................................................................................... 202
IL10 Event FCB-Error ................................................................................................................................................... 202
Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................................. 163
Interlock.......................................................................................................................................................................... 201
Interlocking ..................................................................................................................................................................... 163
IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 127
JOG enable (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................................... 182
JOG enable (Block 2) ..................................................................................................................................................... 184
JOG enable (Block 3) ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
JOG enable (Block 4) ..................................................................................................................................................... 187
JOG enable (Block 5) ..................................................................................................................................................... 189
Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ................................................................................................................................................. 27
KP Adaptation ................................................................................................................................................................ 101
Language ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
LC Load Measurement ............................................................................................................................................ 88, 130
LC Characteristic Value............................................................................................................................................ 88, 130
LC Filter.................................................................................................................................................................... 94, 130
LC Rated Capacity ................................................................................................................................................... 89, 130
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 96
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 95
Limit Max. Bin Error ........................................................................................................................................................ 155
Limit Values...................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Linearization ........................................................................................................................................................... 177, 178
Linearization I1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 177
Linearization I2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 177
Linearization I3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 178
Linearization I4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 178
Linearization ON ............................................................................................................................................................ 177
Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
Linearization S2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
Linearization S3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 178
Linearization S4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 178
Linearizing the measurement ........................................................................................................................................... 40
Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ..................................................................................................................... 237
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 205
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 205
LO11 Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 205
Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................................ 88
Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ....................................................................................................................................... 89
Load Offset..................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Load Range.................................................................................................................................................................... 104

Index
Local Mode (Gate) ......................................................................................................................................................... 190

Local Mode (Speed) ....................................................................................................................................................... 181
Local operation............................................................................................................................................................... 223
Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves........................................................................................................ 226
Logger cycle time ........................................................................................................................................................... 174
Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) ........................................................................................................................ 35
Lower Limit ............................................................................................................................................................... 99, 139
Maintenance and Recalibration ........................................................................................................................................ 49
Maintenance Electric ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
Maintenance Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 117
Maintenance interval ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
Material Correction ........................................................................................................................................................... 97
Material Flow .................................................................................................................................................................. 202
MAX ............................................................................................................................................................................... 203
Maximum Fill Weight ...................................................................................................................................................... 149
Measured Values and Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 19
Measuring principle ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
Measuring the flow rate (measure)................................................................................................................................. 211
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 202
MF06 Event Out of Tolerance ...................................................................................................................................... 202
MF07 Event Batch setpoint Limit .................................................................................................................................. 203
MIN................................................................................................................................................................................. 205
Minimum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................................... 148
Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation.................................................................................... 21
Moisture ......................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Moisture Active............................................................................................................................................................... 156
Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................................. 158
Moisture Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 157
Moisture Range .............................................................................................................................................................. 157
Moisture Select .............................................................................................................................................................. 157
Motor Select ................................................................................................................................................................... 191
Motor Select (Block 1) .................................................................................................................................................... 181
Name of the Device .......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Net Mask ........................................................................................................................................................................ 127
Nominal Bin Load ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
Nominal Flow Rate ........................................................................................................................................................... 84
Nominal Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................... 157
Offset FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 166
Offset FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 167
Offset FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 168
Offset FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 168
Offset FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 169
ON in Remote (Block 1) ................................................................................................................................................. 181
ON/OFF Clock ON ......................................................................................................................................................... 162
On/Off Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 19
ON/OFF Select............................................................................................................................................................... 162
OPEN in Remote ............................................................................................................................................................ 191
Operating and Control Access ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Operating Fields and Function Calls ................................................................................................................................ 20
Operating the calibration functions ................................................................................................................................... 31
Operating the control measurement (KME) ...................................................................................................................... 43
Operation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .......................................................................................................................... 39
Own Address.................................................................................................................................................................. 117
P01 - Hardware Modules.................................................................................................................................................. 75
P01.01 - Analog Channel A10 .......................................................................................................................................... 76
P01.02 - Analog Channel A11 .......................................................................................................................................... 76
P01.03 - VCU20100-Unit 2............................................................................................................................................... 76

Index
P01.04 - VCU2 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................. 76

P01.06 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 77
P01.07 - VCU20100-Unit 3............................................................................................................................................... 77
P01.10 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 .......................................................................................................... 77
P01.11 - VHM RS485 Address......................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.12 - VMO20100-Unit 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 78
P01.13 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ......................................................................................................... 78
P01.14 - VMO20100-Unit 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 78
P01.15 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ......................................................................................................... 78
P02 - Dialog Behaviour .................................................................................................................................................... 78
P02.01 - Language ........................................................................................................................................................... 79
P02.02 - Units .................................................................................................................................................................. 79
P02.03 - Scale Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 79
P02.04 - Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................ 79
P02.05 - Remote IP Address HMI 1 ................................................................................................................................. 80
P02.06 - Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................ 80
P02.11 - Event Communication VHM serial .................................................................................................................... 81
P02.12 - Password ........................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.13 - 2. Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.14 - Reset Counter 1................................................................................................................................................. 82
P02.15 - Reset Counter 2................................................................................................................................................. 82
P02.16 - Batch control ...................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.17 - Switch Grav./Vol. command .............................................................................................................................. 82
P02.18 - Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ........................................................................................................................ 83
P02.19 - Prefeeder start/stop ........................................................................................................................................... 83
P02.20 - Data Log ON/OFF.............................................................................................................................................. 83
P02.21 - Exit Scale ........................................................................................................................................................... 83
P03 - Feeder Definition .................................................................................................................................................... 83
P03.01 - Control ............................................................................................................................................................... 83
P03.02 - Nominal Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................................ 84
P03.03 - Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................. 84
P03.04 - Counter 1 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 84
P03.05 - Counter 2 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 85
P03.06 - Counter 3 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 85
P03.07 - Pulse Length Total ............................................................................................................................................. 85
P03.08 - DO Pulse Counter............................................................................................................................................. 86
P03.09 - Totalizer Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 86
P04 - Control Sources ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
P04.01 - Feeder Start ....................................................................................................................................................... 86
P04.02 - Feedrate Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................. 86
P04.03 - Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................. 86
P04.04 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 87
P04.05 - Source Run Enable............................................................................................................................................ 87
P04.06 - Event Run Disabled .......................................................................................................................................... 87
P04.07 - Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................... 87
P04.08 - Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................... 88
P04.09 - Relative Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 88
P05 - Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 88
P05.01 - LC Load Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 88
P05.02 - LC Characteristic Value ..................................................................................................................................... 88
P05.03 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ......................................................................................................................... 88
P05.04 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................ 89
P05.05 - LC Rated Capacity............................................................................................................................................. 89
P05.06 - Device Constant ................................................................................................................................................ 89
P06 - Feeder control ........................................................................................................................................................ 89
P06.01 - Volumetric Start-Up ........................................................................................................................................... 89
P06.02 - Afterflow Totalizer .............................................................................................................................................. 89
P07 - Feeder Monitoring................................................................................................................................................... 89
P07.01 - Event Stand-By ................................................................................................................................................. 90

Index
P07.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ......................................................................................................................................... 90

P07.03 - Event Error LC Input ......................................................................................................................................... 90
P07.04 - Event LC Input < MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 90
P07.05 - Event LC Input > MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 91
P07.06 - Event Setpoint Limited ...................................................................................................................................... 91
P07.07 - Event Power Failure ......................................................................................................................................... 91
P07.08 - Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................... 92
P07.09 - Threshold Deviation ........................................................................................................................................... 92
P07.10 - Factor Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 92
P07.11 - Deviation abs. max. ........................................................................................................................................... 92
P07.12 - Event Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 93
P07.13 - Event Controller Limited ................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.14 - Event Memory................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset .............................................................................................................................. 94
P07.16 - Source Emergency Setpoint .............................................................................................................................. 94
P07.17 - Emergency Setpoint .......................................................................................................................................... 94
P08 - Filters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 94
P08.01 - LC Filter ............................................................................................................................................................. 94
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 94
P08.03 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog .......................................................................................................................... 95
P08.04 - Filter Load ......................................................................................................................................................... 95
P08.05 - Filter Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 95
P09 - Limit Values ............................................................................................................................................................ 95
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................. 95
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................. 95
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 96
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................ 96
P10 - Calibration Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 96
P10.01 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................... 96
P10.02 - Basic Tare ......................................................................................................................................................... 96
P10.03 - Tare Correction .................................................................................................................................................. 96
P10.04 - Zeroing Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 97
P10.05 - Calibration Time................................................................................................................................................. 97
P10.06 - Tare Correction Check ....................................................................................................................................... 97
P10.07 - Calibration Weight ............................................................................................................................................. 97
P10.08 - Material Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 97
P11 - Rate controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 97
P11.01 - Controller Type .................................................................................................................................................. 98
P11.02 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................... 98
P11.03 - I-Component TN ................................................................................................................................................ 98
P11.04 - Lower Limit ........................................................................................................................................................ 99
P11.05 - Upper Limit ........................................................................................................................................................ 99
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................... 99
P11.07 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................... 99
P11.08 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 100
P11.09 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................ 100
P11.10 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ...................................................................................................................................... 100
P11.11 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ..................................................................................................................................... 101
P11.12 - KP Adaptation .................................................................................................................................................. 101
P11.13 - Setpoint Threshold........................................................................................................................................... 101
P11.14 - S P-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 102
P11.15 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................ 102
P11.16 - S Threshold Response ................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.17 - Compensation Element ................................................................................................................................... 102
P12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 102
P12.01 - AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................... 103
P12.02 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 103
P12.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 103
P12.05 - Flow Rate Offset .............................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.06 - Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................. 104
P12.07 - AO Load ......................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.08 - Load Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.09 - Load Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.10 - AO Deviation................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.11 - Deviation Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 104

Index
P12.12 - Deviation Range .............................................................................................................................................. 105

P12.13 - AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................ 105
P13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 105
P13.01 - Event External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................... 105
P13.02 - DI External Event 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 105
P13.09 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 107
P13.15 - DI Acknowledge Events .................................................................................................................................. 108
P13.16 - DI Local Mode................................................................................................................................................. 109
P13.17 - DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 109
P13.18 - DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................... 109
P13.19 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 109
P13.20 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 109
P13.21 - Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7...................................................................................................................... 110
P13.22 - Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7...................................................................................................................... 110
P14 - Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 110
P14.01 - DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................... 110
P14.02 - DO Start Prefeeder ......................................................................................................................................... 110
P14.03 - DO ALARM ..................................................................................................................................................... 110
P14.04 - DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 111
P14.05 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 111
P14.06 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 111
P14.07 - DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 111
P14.08 - DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 111
P14.09 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................ 111
P14.10 - DO Keyboard Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 112
P15 - Batch Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.01 - Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.02 - Batch Setpoint Source ..................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.03 - Adaptation Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 112
P15.04 - Correction Amount ........................................................................................................................................... 113
P15.05 - Adaptation Factor ............................................................................................................................................ 113
P15.06 - Batch Automatic Record .................................................................................................................................. 113
P15.07 - DI Batch Terminate ......................................................................................................................................... 113
P15.08 - DO Batch Running .......................................................................................................................................... 113
P15.09 - DO Dribble Feed ............................................................................................................................................. 114
P15.10 - DO Full Feed .................................................................................................................................................. 114
P15.12 - Analog Setpoint Relat. ..................................................................................................................................... 114
P15.13 - Batch Setpoint Range ...................................................................................................................................... 114
P15.14 - Batch Setpoint Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 114
P15.15 - Adaptation Time............................................................................................................................................... 114
P15.16 - Adaption Start Value ........................................................................................................................................ 114
P15.17 - Time Dribble Feed 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 115
P15.18 - Value Dribble Feed 2 ....................................................................................................................................... 115
P15.19 - DO Dribble Feed 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 115
P15.20 - Batch Tolerance............................................................................................................................................... 115
P15.21 - Event Out of Tolerance ................................................................................................................................... 115
P15.24 - Batch Setpoint Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 116
P15.25 - Event Batch setpoint Limit .............................................................................................................................. 116
P15.26 - Batch behaviour after power down .................................................................................................................. 116
P16 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................................. 116
P16.01 - Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 116
P16.02 - Event Maint. Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 117
P16.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................ 117
P16.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 117
P17 - Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................. 117

Index
P17.01 - Own Address ................................................................................................................................................... 117

P17.02 - Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................................................ 118
P17.03 - Format Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 118
P18 - Communication Fieldbus ...................................................................................................................................... 118
P18.01 - Protocol Type................................................................................................................................................... 119
P18.02 - Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................... 119
P18.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .......................................................................................................................... 119
P18.04 - Event Acyclic Communication......................................................................................................................... 120
P18.05 - Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................ 120
P18.06 - Compatibility DISOCONT Master .................................................................................................................... 120
P18.07 - Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 120
P18.08 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 120
P18.09 - Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 121
P18.10 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
P18.11 - Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
P18.12 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 121
P18.13 - Data Format ..................................................................................................................................................... 122
P18.14 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P18.15 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 122
P18.16 - FLOAT-Format................................................................................................................................................. 122
P18.17 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 122
P18.18 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 122
P18.19 - Parameter ........................................................................................................................................................ 123
P18.20 - Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................... 123
P18.21 - READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................... 123
P18.22 - Access Rights Limitation FB ............................................................................................................................ 123
P18.23 - Remote IP Address FB .................................................................................................................................... 123
P19 - Fixed mode configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 124
P19.01 - ID Preset Value 1............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.02 - ID Preset Value 2............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.03 - ID Preset Value 3............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.04 - ID Preset Value 4............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.05 - ID Preset Value 5............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.06 - ID Preset Value 6............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.07 - ID Preset Value 7............................................................................................................................................. 124
P19.08 - ID Preset Value 8............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.09 - ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.10 - ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.11 - ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.12 - ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.13 - ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.14 - ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.15 - ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P19.16 - ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 126
P19.17 - ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 126
P19.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................ 126
P19.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................ 126
P19.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................ 126
P19.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................ 126
P19.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................ 126
P19.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................ 126
P19.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................ 127
P20 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................ 127
P20.01 - IP Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
P20.02 - Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
P20.03 - Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................... 127
P21 - PLC Outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
P21.01 - DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
P21.02 - DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.03 - DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.04 - DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.05 - DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.06 - DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.07 - DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.08 - DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P21.09 - AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 129

Index
P21.10 - AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 129

P21.23 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................. 129
P22 - Bin Weigher .......................................................................................................................................................... 129
P22.01 - Bin Weigher Active .......................................................................................................................................... 129
P22.02 - LC Load Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 130
P22.03 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 130
P22.04 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 130
P22.05 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 130
P22.06 - Bipolar Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 131
P22.07 - Event Error LC Input (Bin) .............................................................................................................................. 131
P22.08 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 131
P22.09 - Nominal Bin Load ............................................................................................................................................ 131
P22.10 - Display Format................................................................................................................................................. 132
P22.11 - Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 132
P22.12 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 132
P22.13 - Control Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 132
P22.14 - DO Bin Filling .................................................................................................................................................. 133
P22.15 - Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 133
P22.16 - Event Bin Level MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 133
P22.17 - DO Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 133
P22.18 - Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 133
P22.19 - Event Bin Level MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 134
P22.20 - DO Bin Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 134
P22.21 - AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 134
P22.22 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
P22.23 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 134
P22.24 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 135
P22.25 - Tare (Bin)......................................................................................................................................................... 135
P22.26 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 135
P22.27 - Controller in OFF-Mode ................................................................................................................................... 135
P22.28 - DI Bin Load Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 135
P22.29 - Event Bin Load MAX Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 136
P22.30 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................... 136
P22.31 - Bin Level analog Input Range .......................................................................................................................... 136
P23 - Bin Level Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 137
P23.01 - Bin Controller ON............................................................................................................................................. 137
P23.02 - Filling Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 137
P23.03 - AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level................................................................................................................. 137
P23.04 - DO Feeder ON................................................................................................................................................ 137
P23.05 - Setpoint Bin Level ............................................................................................................................................ 137
P23.06 - Feeder Constant .............................................................................................................................................. 138
P23.07 - Dead Time TT .................................................................................................................................................. 138
P23.08 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 138
P23.09 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 138
P23.10 - D Portion TV .................................................................................................................................................... 138
P23.11 - D Filter TD ....................................................................................................................................................... 138
P23.12 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 139
P23.13 - Bypass D Portion ............................................................................................................................................. 139
P23.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 139
P23.15 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
P23.16 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
P23.17 - Dead Band Deviation ....................................................................................................................................... 140
P23.18 - Dead Band Factor............................................................................................................................................ 140
P23.19 - Setpoint Filter................................................................................................................................................... 140
P23.20 - Flow Rate Filter................................................................................................................................................ 140
P23.21 - DI Init. Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 140
P23.22 - Bin Setpoint source.......................................................................................................................................... 140
P23.24 - Stepper ............................................................................................................................................................ 141
P23.25 - S P-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 141
P23.26 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................ 141
P23.27 - S D-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 141
P23.28 - S Threshold Resp. .......................................................................................................................................... 142
P23.29 - S Compensation Element ............................................................................................................................... 142
P23.30 - S DO Open Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 142
P23.31 - S DO Close Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 142
P23.32 - AI Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 142

Index
P23.33 - AI Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................... 143

P23.34 - AI Range (B) ................................................................................................................................................... 143
P23.35 - AO Position Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 143
P23.36 - AO Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................. 143
P23.37 - AO Range (B) ................................................................................................................................................. 143
P23.38 - Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................ 144
P23.39 - Position MIN Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................. 144
P23.40 - Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 144
P23.41 - Position MAX Flow Gate(B) ............................................................................................................................. 145
P24 - Check System ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P24.01 - Type of Check System ..................................................................................................................................... 145
P24.02 - Auto Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 146
P24.03 - Cyclic Auto Start .............................................................................................................................................. 146
P24.04 - Cycle Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 146
P24.05 - Release Check System ................................................................................................................................... 146
P24.06 - Event No Check Release................................................................................................................................ 147
P24.07 - Check Start Span............................................................................................................................................. 147
P24.08 - Check Start Tare.............................................................................................................................................. 147
P24.09 - Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 147
P24.10 - Finish Check Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 148
P24.11 - Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................ 148
P24.12 - Storage Quantity .............................................................................................................................................. 148
P24.13 - Minimum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................ 148
P24.14 - Event Minimum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................. 149
P24.15 - Maximum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................... 149
P24.16 - Event Maximum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................ 149
P24.17 - Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................. 149
P24.18 - DO Control Started ......................................................................................................................................... 149
P24.19 - Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................... 150
P24.20 - Event Feeder Not Stopped ............................................................................................................................. 150
P24.21 - Event Prepare Check Measurement ............................................................................................................... 150
P24.22 - DO Check Measurement Active...................................................................................................................... 150
P24.23 - Event Expect Acceptance ............................................................................................................................... 151
P24.24 - DO Expect Acceptance.................................................................................................................................... 151
P24.25 - Absolute Range ............................................................................................................................................... 151
P24.26 - Relative Range ................................................................................................................................................ 151
P24.27 - Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 152
P24.28 - Event Relative Tare Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 152
P24.29 - Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................ 153
P24.30 - Event Relative Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 153
P24.31 - Correction Evaluation ...................................................................................................................................... 153
P24.32 - Correction Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 153
P24.33 - AO Check Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................... 154
P24.34 - DO Check Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 154
P24.35 - Check Gate Feedback ..................................................................................................................................... 154
P24.36 - Check Gate Time ............................................................................................................................................. 155
P24.37 - Event Check Gate Error.................................................................................................................................. 155
P24.38 - Limit Max. Bin Error ......................................................................................................................................... 155
P24.39 - Event Bin Error ............................................................................................................................................... 156
P24.40 - DO Correction Error ........................................................................................................................................ 156
P25 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................ 156
P25.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................ 156
P25.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................ 157
P25.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................... 157
P25.04 - Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................. 157
P25.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 157
P25.06 - Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................... 157
P25.07 - DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................... 158
P25.08 - Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 158
P25.09 - DO Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 158
P25.10 - Event Moisture MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 158
P25.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................. 158
P25.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 159
P25.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ...................................................................................................................................... 159
P25.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .................................................................................................................................. 159
P26 - Additional device................................................................................................................................... 159, 160, 161

Index
P26.01 - Auto Zero Active .............................................................................................................................................. 159

P26.02 - Auto Zero Limit ................................................................................................................................................ 160
P26.03 - Event Tare Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 160
P26.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active ....................................................................................................................................... 160
P26.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 161
P26.06 - DO Agitator ON............................................................................................................................................... 161
P26.07 - START Agitator................................................................................................................................................ 161
P27 - Dead Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 161
P27.01 - Dead Time Active ............................................................................................................................................ 161
P27.02 - Dead Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 162
P27.03 - Setpoint Select................................................................................................................................................. 162
P27.04 - Setpoint Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 162
P27.05 - ON/OFF Select ................................................................................................................................................ 162
P27.06 - ON/OFF Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 162
P27.07 - Time Elements Preassign ................................................................................................................................ 162
P27.08 - Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................... 163
P27.09 - DO Dead Time Active ..................................................................................................................................... 163
P27.10 - DO Setpoint Active ......................................................................................................................................... 163
P27.11 - DO ON/OFF Active ......................................................................................................................................... 163
P28 - Interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................... 163
P28.01 - DI Event Mechanics 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 163
P28.06 - DI Event Electricity 1....................................................................................................................................... 164
P28.09 - DO Event Mechanics ...................................................................................................................................... 164
P28.10 - Event Mechanics ............................................................................................................................................ 165
P28.11 - DO Event Electricity ........................................................................................................................................ 165
P28.12 - Event Electricity .............................................................................................................................................. 165
P28.13 - DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................... 165
P28.14 - DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................... 165
P28.15 - Event Mechatronics ........................................................................................................................................ 165
P28.16 - DO Ready ....................................................................................................................................................... 165
P28.17 - Event Not Ready............................................................................................................................................. 166
P28.18 - DO Ready for Start ......................................................................................................................................... 166
P28.19 - Event Not Ready for Start ............................................................................................................................... 166
P29 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................................................................................. 166
P29.01 - FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P29.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 166
P29.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 166
P29.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 167
P29.05 - FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 167
P29.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 167
P29.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 167
P29.09 - FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 167
P29.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 168
P29.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................ 168
P29.13 - FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 168
P29.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 168
P29.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................ 169
P29.17 - FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 169
P29.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 169
P29.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................ 169
P29.21 - FCB Variant ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P29.22 - Event FCB-Error ............................................................................................................................................. 170
P30 - FCB digital outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 170
P30.01 - FCB_DO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P30.02 - FCB_DO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P30.03 - FCB_DO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171

Index
P30.04 - FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171

P30.05 - FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P30.06 - FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P30.07 - FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P30.08 - FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P30.09 - FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.10 - FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.11 - FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.12 - FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.13 - FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.14 - FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.15 - FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P30.16 - FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P30.17 - FCB_DO 17 ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P30.18 - FCB_DO 18 ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P30.19 - FCB_DO 19 ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P30.20 - FCB_DO 20 ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P31 - Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................................ 173
P31.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................ 173
P31.02 - Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................... 173
P31.03 - Logger cycle time............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.04 - Data Log Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.05 - Data Log Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.06 - Data Log Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.07 - Data Log Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.08 - Data Log Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.09 - Data Log Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................. 174
P31.10 - Data Log Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................. 175
P31.11 - Data Log Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................. 175
P31.12 - Data Log Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................. 175
P31.13 - Data Log Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................... 175
P32 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................................................................................... 175
P32.01 - HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................... 175
P32.02 - HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................... 175
P32.03 - HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.04 - HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.05 - HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.06 - HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.07 - HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.08 - HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.09 - HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P32.10 - HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 176
P33 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................................. 177, 178
P33.01 - Linearization ON .............................................................................................................................................. 177
P33.02 - Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................... 177
P33.03 - Linearization I1 ................................................................................................................................................ 177
P33.10 - Event Linearization Error ................................................................................................................................ 178
P34 - Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 178
P34.01 - S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 178
P34.02 - S DO Close Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 179
P34.03 - AI Position Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 179
P34.04 - AI Offset.......................................................................................................................................................... 179
P34.05 - AI Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 179
P34.06 - AO Position Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 179
P34.07 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 179
P34.08 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 179
P34.09 - Event MIN Flow Gate ...................................................................................................................................... 180
P34.10 - Position MIN Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 180
P34.11 - Event MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 180
P34.12 - Position MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................. 180

Index
P35 - Local Mode (Speed) ............................................................................................................................................. 181

P35.01 - Motor Select (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................... 181
P35.02 - ON in Remote (Block 1) ................................................................................................................................... 181
P35.03 - Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................ 181
P35.04 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) .............................................................................................................. 182
P35.05 - JOG enable (Block 1) ...................................................................................................................................... 182
P35.06 - Release local Start (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 182
P35.07 - DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 182
P35.10 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 183
P36 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................................................................................ 190
P36.01 - Motor Select..................................................................................................................................................... 191
P36.02 - OPEN in Remote ............................................................................................................................................. 191
P36.03 - DI Limit Switch OPEN ..................................................................................................................................... 191
P36.04 - CLOSE in Remote ........................................................................................................................................... 191
P36.05 - DI Limit Switch CLOSE ................................................................................................................................... 191
P36.06 - Release local Start........................................................................................................................................... 192
P36.07 - DI External Error 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 192
Parameter ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules......................................................................................................................... 75
Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ........................................................................................................................... 78
Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ........................................................................................................................... 83
Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ............................................................................................................................. 86

Index
Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .................................................................................................................................... 88

Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ............................................................................................................................... 89
Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring.......................................................................................................................... 89
Parameter Block 08 - Filters ............................................................................................................................................. 94
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ................................................................................................................................... 95
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................. 96
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ............................................................................................................................... 97
Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 102
Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 105
Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 110
Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ................................................................................................................................. 112
Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval.................................................................................................................... 116
Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe ......................................................................................................... 117
Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus ............................................................................................................. 118
Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................ 123
Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet ....................................................................................................................................... 127
Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 127
Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher ................................................................................................................................. 129
Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller ..................................................................................................................... 137
Parameter Block 24 - Check System ............................................................................................................................. 145
Parameter Block 25 - Moisture ....................................................................................................................................... 156
Parameter Block 26 - Additional device.......................................................................................................................... 159
Parameter Block 27 - Dead Time ................................................................................................................................... 161
Parameter Block 28 - Interlocking .................................................................................................................................. 163
Parameter Block 29 - FCB analog outputs ..................................................................................................................... 166
Parameter Block 30 - FCB digital outputs ...................................................................................................................... 170
Parameter Block 31 - Data Logging ............................................................................................................................... 173
Parameter Block 32 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................ 175
Parameter Block 33 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................ 177
Parameter Block 34 - Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 178
Parameter Block 35 - Local Mode (Speed) .................................................................................................................... 180
Parameter Block 36 - Local Mode (Gate) ....................................................................................................................... 190
Parameter Details ............................................................................................................................................................ 75
Parameter List .................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Parameter Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 55
Parameters....................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Password ......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P-Component KP ..................................................................................................................................................... 98, 138
Physics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
PLC Functionality (Optional) .......................................................................................................................................... 240
PLC Outputs................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Position at STOP...................................................................................................................................................... 99, 129
Position MAX Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................ 180
Position MAX Flow Gate(B)............................................................................................................................................ 145
Position MIN Flow Gate.................................................................................................................................................. 180
Position MIN Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................ 144
Prefeeder start/stop .......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................................. 123
Protocol Type ................................................................................................................................................................. 119
Pulse Counter corrected................................................................................................................................................. 159
Pulse Length Total ........................................................................................................................................................... 85
Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ............................................................................................................... 245
Range Correction ..................................................................................................................................................... 96, 135
Range FCB_AO 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
Range FCB_AO 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 167
Range FCB_AO 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 168
Range FCB_AO 4 .......................................................................................................................................................... 169
Range FCB_AO 5 .......................................................................................................................................................... 169
Rate controller .................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Rated Data ....................................................................................................................................................................... 88
READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................................. 123
Reading and Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 29
Reference FCB_AO 1..................................................................................................................................................... 167
Reference FCB_AO 2..................................................................................................................................................... 167
Reference FCB_AO 3..................................................................................................................................................... 168
Reference FCB_AO 4..................................................................................................................................................... 169

Index
Reference FCB_AO 5..................................................................................................................................................... 170

regulated ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Relative Range............................................................................................................................................................... 151
Relative Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
Relative Setpoint Offset.................................................................................................................................................... 88
Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................. 88
Release Check System .................................................................................................................................................. 146
Release local Start ......................................................................................................................................................... 192
Release local Start (Block 1) .......................................................................................................................................... 182
Remote IP Address FB................................................................................................................................................... 123
Remote IP Address HMI 1................................................................................................................................................ 80
Reset Counter 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 82
Reset Counter 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 82
Reset to Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 30
Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter .................................................................................................................. 24
Resolution ...................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .................................................. 21
S Compensation Element.............................................................................................................................................. 142
S D-Component ............................................................................................................................................................ 141
S DO Close Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 179
S DO Close Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................ 142
S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 178
S DO Open Flow Gate (B)............................................................................................................................................. 142
S I-Component ...................................................................................................................................................... 102, 141
S P-Component..................................................................................................................................................... 102, 141
S Threshold Resp. ........................................................................................................................................................ 142
S Threshold Response .................................................................................................................................................. 102
Safety notes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 205
SC02 Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 205
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................... 206
SC04 Event Maint. Electric........................................................................................................................................... 206
SC05 Event External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 206
Scale Name...................................................................................................................................................................... 79
Selecting the operating range .......................................................................................................................................... 18
Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) .................................................................................................................. 33
Separated Units Control Type .......................................................................................................................................... 41
Sequence Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................... 205
Service Functions ............................................................................................................................................................. 29
Set setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Set the Homepage (Config).............................................................................................................................................. 34
Setpoint and switch-on sources ..................................................................................................................................... 209
Setpoint Bin Level .......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Setpoint Clock ON .......................................................................................................................................................... 162
Setpoint Filter ................................................................................................................................................................. 140
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord .................................................................................................................................................... 100
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ................................................................................................................................................... 101
Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 87, 103
Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 86, 103
Setpoint Select ............................................................................................................................................................... 162
Setpoint Threshold ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ..................................................................................................................................... 32
Setting the Clock .............................................................................................................................................................. 30
Setting the Display ........................................................................................................................................................... 33
Signal Words ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Signal Words for Application Notes .................................................................................................................................... 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 4

Index
Simulation Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 31

Single Unit Control Type .................................................................................................................................................. 41
Some Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Source Emergency Setpoint............................................................................................................................................. 94
Source Relative Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................. 87
Source Run Enable .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Special Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 25
Stand-By Limit Value ........................................................................................................................................................ 90
START Agitator .............................................................................................................................................................. 161
Startup.............................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Step controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 218
Stepper........................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................................ 148
Store............................................................................................................................................................................... 100
Switch Feeding On/Off ..................................................................................................................................................... 22
Switch Grav./Vol. command ............................................................................................................................................. 82
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 83
Switch on.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Switching the Scales On/Off............................................................................................................................................. 22
SY01 Event Memory .................................................................................................................................................... 206
SY02 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 207
SY03 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ........................................................................................................... 207
SY04 Event Communication HMI 1 .............................................................................................................................. 207
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial ...................................................................................................................... 207
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication .............................................................................................................................. 208
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................ 208
SY15 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 208
SY16 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 208
Symbol for Running Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 19
System Message ............................................................................................................................................................ 206
Tab.01: Definition for formula symbols ............................................................................................................................... 8
Tab.02: Operating access ................................................................................................................................................ 12
Tab.03: Function calls on the scales controller homepage............................................................................................... 16
Tab.04: Work areas and functions ................................................................................................................................... 21
Tab.05: Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation ................................................................................ 21
Tab.06: Control keys ........................................................................................................................................................ 25
Tab.07: Keys in the lines configuration ............................................................................................................................ 26
Tab.08: Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5) ...................................................................................... 27
Tab.09: Bin weigher parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Tab.10: Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level ..................................................................................................... 29
Tab.11: Parameter sets: Usage and activation ................................................................................................................ 30
Tab.12: Keys for the calibration programs........................................................................................................................ 32
Tab.13: Keys in the VHM configuration dialog ................................................................................................................. 32
Tab.14: Fields for setting the address .............................................................................................................................. 33
Tab.15: Parameters for the display .................................................................................................................................. 33
Tab.16: Keys in the list of scales ...................................................................................................................................... 33
Tab.17: Setting startup routine ......................................................................................................................................... 34
Tab.18: Alternatives ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Tab.19: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 36
Tab.22: The details and process of taring for the bin weigher .......................................................................................... 38
Tab.23: The details and process of checking the weight of the bin weigher .................................................................... 39
Tab.24: The details and process of improving bin level regulation ................................................................................... 39
Tab.25: Basic parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 45
Tab.26: Carrying out calibration ....................................................................................................................................... 46
Tab.27: Suggested actions............................................................................................................................................... 49
Tab.28: Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus................................................................................................. 51
Tab.29: Abbreviations frequently used in parameters ...................................................................................................... 52
Tab.30: Step-by-step specification of signal links............................................................................................................. 53
Tab.31: Signal sources and their descriptions.................................................................................................................. 53
Tab.32: Meaning of the columns ...................................................................................................................................... 53
Tab.33: The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal .......................................................... 54
Tab.34: Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel....................................................... 54

Index
Tab.35: Event classes ...................................................................................................................................................... 54

Tab.36: Event groups ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
Tab.37: States and points in time in the flow chart ......................................................................................................... 210
Tab.38: Relevant parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 211
Tab.40: Controller models and how they are used ......................................................................................................... 213
Tab.42: Special cases for KP and TN parameters ......................................................................................................... 215
Tab.43: Set-up notes for parameters in the constant controller...................................................................................... 216
Tab.44: Characteristics in special operational states ..................................................................................................... 217
Tab.45: The control parameters for the step controller .................................................................................................. 219
Tab.46: Switching and operational states....................................................................................................................... 219
Tab.47: Some signals of the control logic....................................................................................................................... 220
Tab.48: Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder................................................................... 222
Tab.49: The meaning of the abbreviations in the block diagram .................................................................................... 234
Tab.50: Blocks available for processing binary signals .................................................................................................. 243
Tab.51: Long counting pulse .......................................................................................................................................... 245
Tab.52: Counting pulse weight ....................................................................................................................................... 245
Tare (Bin) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................................ 96
Tare Correction Check ..................................................................................................................................................... 97
Taring the bin weigher ...................................................................................................................................................... 38
Taring the flowthrough measurement ............................................................................................................................... 36
Terminology ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................................................. 45
The logic for position-controlled feed gates .................................................................................................................... 228
The web server in the scales controller (VCU) ................................................................................................................. 15
Threshold Deviation ......................................................................................................................................................... 92
Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Time Dribble Feed 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 115
Time Elements Preassign .............................................................................................................................................. 162
Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................................. 119
Totalizer Increment .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
Type of Check System ................................................................................................................................................... 145
Types of control measurement ......................................................................................................................................... 41
Units ................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
unregulated ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Upper Limit ............................................................................................................................................................... 99, 139
Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ........................................................................... 239
Value Dribble Feed 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 115
VCU2 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................................. 76
VCU20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 76
VCU20100-Unit 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 77
VHM operating panel ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
VHM RS485 Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 78
VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 78
VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 78
Volumetric Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Volumetric Start-Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Volumetric Synchronous Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 10
WE01 Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 199
WE02 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 199
WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset............................................................................................................................... 200
WE13 Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ........................................................................................................................ 201
WE14 Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ........................................................................................................................ 201
Weight check flowthrough meter ...................................................................................................................................... 37
What is the DISOCONT Tersus? ....................................................................................................................................... 7

Index
Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................. 120

Zero Drop-Out Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 160
Zero Drop-Out Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 161
Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................................... 97


BVH2414GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BVH2414GB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BVH2414GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM®

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

© by Schenck Process GmbH

All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,

Note: Translation of the original German Instruction

(origin: ST4, 499198859 V1)

1 About This Manual ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

5.6 Check with bulk solids ........................................................................................................................ 47

6 Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................

8 Event Messages ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ........................................................................................................... 197

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

1 About This Manual

This manual is available in different forms:

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

Acknowledging Event Messages

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

Service and Maintenance

Moisture and Humidity

2.1 Signal Words

2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?

DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

3.2 Some Definitions

Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Dimension Example

3.3 Measuring principle

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

Fig. 1: The MULTISTREAM measuring principle

3.4 Automatic control

3.5 Control operating modes

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

3.7 Additional Bin Weighers

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

4.2 Operating and Control Access

Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246

Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer

4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable

4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth

BV-H2414GB, 1246 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485

4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)

4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, 1246